JP2012070791A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine that effectively giving an advance notice by drawing a player's attention to a notice using reserves displayed by a reserve display part.SOLUTION: When the number of stored reserves reaches 4 in response to start winning, whether to perform continuous rendering is determined. When the continuous rendering is performed, the followings are determined: which color blue, red or rainbow colors is selected for changing display in each of the reserves 4-1; whether to stop displaying reserves at the time of reserve 2 or reserve 1, in the case of losing a prize; whether to move a first reserve display accessory 5D at an angle of 25°, 50°, or 75° when winning a prize; and whether to move the first reserve display accessory 5D also at the start of a target variable display. Continuous rendering is carried out in a pattern corresponding to the determination.

Description

  The present invention has variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the game result is determined by deriving the display result to the variable display means. In addition, the present invention relates to a gaming machine that shifts to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the game result is a specific gaming result.

  Conventionally, as a gaming machine of this type, generally, the right to perform variable display of symbols is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4) based on the fact that it has been started winning at a predetermined starting winning opening, and fluctuates. After the display is finished, the variable display for the number of reserved storage is performed. The number of reserved memories is displayed, for example, on a hold display unit provided so as to be visible to the player, and the display mode is updated according to the number of reserved memories of variable display, and in advance at the timing of winning a start Each random number value is extracted and stored, and it is determined in advance whether or not a big hit will be made when the variable display corresponding to the start winning is executed, and based on the determination result, the hold display of the hold display unit By changing the display to a display different from the normal display, there is one that executes a notice effect for notifying that there is a possibility of a big hit when the variable display corresponding to the reserved storage is executed. (For example, refer to Patent Document 1).

JP 2010-119533 A

  However, in Patent Document 1, there is a possibility that only by changing the hold display of the hold display unit to a display different from the normal display, a big hit is obtained when the variable display corresponding to the hold storage is executed. Therefore, there is a problem that an effective notice cannot be made because the player is not paying attention to these notices and the display of the change of the subject of the notice is started.

  The present invention has been made paying attention to such problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing an effective advance notice by paying attention to the advance notice by the hold display of the hold display section.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, a gaming machine according to claim 1 of the present invention provides:
Based on the establishment of the start condition (starting winning at the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A, starting winning at the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B), Variable display means (first special symbol display 8a, second special symbol display 8b, image) for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (first special symbol, second special symbol, or decorative symbol) that can identify each of them A display device 5) which is advantageous to the player when the game result is determined by deriving the display result to the variable display means and the game result becomes a specific game result (for example, a big hit game result). A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) to be shifted to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state),
Based on the establishment of the starting condition, the storage means for storing a plurality of right to perform variable display of the identification information up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4) (first special figure storage unit 151A, second special figure) Reservation storage unit 151B, special figure storage unit 195),
Whether the game result is a specific game result (for example, a big hit game result) before the display result of the variable display of the identification information based on one right stored in the holding storage means is derived. A pre-determining means for deciding (a part for executing step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100);
A holding display unit (a plurality of display parts provided on the first holding memory number display combination 5D and the second holding storage number display combination 5U) made movable is provided, and the holding storage unit includes the holding display unit. Hold display means for displaying the number of rights stored in the screen in an identifiable manner (the portion for executing step S903 or step S559 in the CPU 120 for effect control);
On hold determination means (in the game control microcomputer 100) for determining whether or not the determination result by the prior determination means for each right stored in the hold storage means is the determination result as the specific display result. Part for executing step S101),
Based on the determination by the hold determination unit, the hold display mode in the hold display unit corresponding to the right to be determined is changed from a normal display mode (for example, white) to a special display mode (for example, blue, red, rainbow). A notice effect determining means for determining whether or not to execute a notice effect (continuous effect) to be changed to (color) (in the effect control CPU 120, a part for executing the continuous effect start setting process in step S639 ′);
A notice effect executing means for executing the notice effect based on the determination result of the notice effect determining means (the portion for executing the continuous effect process in step S169 in the effect control CPU 120);
With
The notice effect execution means performs notice effect movement control for moving the hold display unit in a predetermined manner in accordance with the execution of the notice effect (see, for example, FIGS. 46 to 53)).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the hold display unit moves in a predetermined manner with the implementation of the notice effect that changes the hold display mode from the normal display mode to the special display mode. It is possible to pay attention to the notice effect by and effective notice can be implemented.
Note that the hold display unit may be displayed as an image instead of an entity, and the movement includes moving the display position.
In addition, “to move the hold display unit in a predetermined manner in accordance with execution of the notice effect” means that the hold display unit is moved in a predetermined manner at the time of executing the notice effect, Moving the hold display unit in a predetermined manner immediately before executing the action, and moving the hold display unit in a predetermined manner immediately after executing the notice effect.

A gaming machine according to means 1 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to claim 1,
Movable bodies (first reserved memory number display combination 5D and second reserved storage number display combination 5U) provided movably, and driving means (first reservation combination motor 83, second holding unit) for operating the movable body. A holding accessory motor 84),
The hold display part is provided on the movable body (see FIG. 46),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the movable body, which is a three-dimensional entity provided with the hold display unit, is moved, so that the player can be further provided with a notice effect compared to the case where the hold display unit is moved according to the image. It can be noticed.

The gaming machine according to means 2 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or means 1, wherein
The notice effect executing means (the portion for executing the effect effect in step S169 in the effect control CPU 120) is a plurality of types of special display modes (for example, blue, red, rainbow) in the notice effect (continuous effect). In the notice effect movement control, a plurality of types of movement amounts (for example, the first reserved memory number display accessory 5D and the second reserved memory number are changed. The moving amount of the display accessory 5U according to the type of the special display mode that changes among the movement angles (25 degrees, 50 degrees, and 75 degrees) from the vertical position to the inclined position, that is, the moving distance to each inclined position). To move the hold display section (see FIG. 17),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the hold display mode changes to a plurality of special display modes, and the hold display unit moves with a movement amount corresponding to the type of the special display mode. It will also pay attention to whether it changes or at what amount of movement, so it can make the notice effect more noticeable to the player, and there is a difference in the amount of movement depending on the position of the hold display part after moving It becomes easy to understand.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of claim 1, means 1, and means 2,
The notice effect executing means (the portion for executing the effect effect in step S169 in the effect control CPU 120) is a plurality of types of special display modes (for example, blue, red, rainbow) in the notice effect (continuous effect). In the notice effect movement control, a plurality of types of movement modes (for example, the first reserved memory number display accessory 5D and the second reserved memory number are changed. In the moving mode according to the type of the special display mode that changes among the moving speed (low speed, medium speed, high speed) and the way of movement (for example, vibration) of the display accessory 5U from the vertical position to the inclined position, Move the display,
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the hold display mode changes to a plurality of special display modes, and the hold display unit moves in a movement mode according to the type of the special display mode. In addition to changing, it will also pay attention to which movement mode it moves, so it can make the notice effect more noticeable to the player and make a difference in the way of movement while moving The player can watch the movement of the hold display unit.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or means 1 to means 3, wherein
The notice effect executing means (the part for executing the effect effect in step S169 in the effect control CPU 120) is configured to perform the hold with the start of the variable display based on the right targeted for the notice effect (continuous effect). Perform variable start time movement control to move the display unit (for example, continuous production pattern X-13, 23),
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player recognize that the variable display based on the right that is the target of the notice effect is started, so that the player can pay attention to the variable display.

The gaming machine according to means 5 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of claim 1 or means 1 to means 4, wherein
A movement amount or a movement mode of the hold display unit (a plurality of display parts provided in the first hold memory number display accessory 5D and the second hold memory number display accessory 5U) in the notice effect (continuous effect), A means for determining one combination pattern from a plurality of combination patterns according to a combination of a movement amount or a movement mode of the hold display portion at the start of variable display, and when the specific display result is obtained by the hold determination means As a combination pattern to be executed when the determination is made, a moving mode determination means for determining a predetermined combination pattern with a higher probability than other combination patterns (in the effect control CPU 120, the continuous effect start setting process in step S639 ′ is executed. Part)
The notice effect execution means (the part of the effect control CPU 120 that executes the continuous effect process in step S169) is the combination determined by the movement mode determination means in the notice effect movement control and the variable start time movement control. Moving the hold display unit in the type of movement amount or movement mode;
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, there is a possibility that a specific display result may be obtained depending on the combination of the movement amount or the movement mode of the hold display unit at the time of the notice effect and the start of variable display according to the right targeted for the notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the start of the variable display from the notice effect.

The gaming machine according to means 6 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of claim 1 or means 1 to 5,
The notice effect determining means (the part for executing the continuous effect start setting process in step S639 ′ in the effect control CPU 120) performs the holding storage means (first special figure) as the timing for executing the notice effect (continuous effect). The first timing (at the time of winning) is the timing at which the right corresponding to the reserved memory subject to the notice effect is stored in the reserved memory unit 151A, the second special figure reserved memory unit 151B, and the special figure reserved memory unit 195). And the second timing (at the start of fluctuation) that is later than the first timing, and the notice effect is produced when the display result of the variable display according to the right becomes the specific display result. Is determined with a higher probability than the first timing (see FIG. 19).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even when the display mode of the reserved memory does not change at the first timing, there is a possibility that it changes at the second timing. As a result, the interest of the game will be improved. In addition, since the possibility of a specific display result varies depending on the timing at which the display mode of the on-hold storage is changed from the normal display mode to the special display mode, the player comes to pay attention to the display mode of the on-hold storage, and the interest of the game Will improve.

The gaming machine according to means 7 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of claim 1 or means 1 to 6,
The notice effect determining means (in the effect control CPU 120, the part for executing the continuous effect start setting process in step S639 ′) is the special display mode (for example, blue, red, rainbow color) as the notice effect (continuous effect). A first notice effect (for example, a continuous effect pattern X-10, 13, 20, 23, 30, 40) for maintaining the hold display changed to) until the variable display according to the right corresponding to the hold display is executed. The second notice for returning the hold display changed to the special display mode to the normal display mode at a predetermined timing (for example, hold 2 and hold 1) before the variable display based on the right corresponding to the hold display is executed. It is possible to decide to execute an effect (for example, continuous effect patterns X-11, 12, 21, 22), and the hold determination means (game controlling microcomputer) 100, it is determined that the first notice effect is to be executed on the condition that the specific display result (for example, the big hit game result) is determined by the part in which step S101 is executed), and the hold determination means It is determined that the second notice effect is executed on the condition that it is determined that the specific display result is not obtained (see FIG. 20).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the frequency of execution of the notice effect, and when the specific display result is not obtained, the notice effect that the special display form returns to the normal display form is executed. It is possible to prevent damage.

The gaming machine according to means 8 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of claim 1 or means 1 to means 7,
The pre-determining means (the part that executes step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) determines whether or not the game result is a specific game result (for example, a big hit game result) and variable display of the variable display Determine whether the pattern is a specific variable display pattern (for example, super reach), which is a specific variable display pattern,
The hold determination means (the part that executes step S101 in the game control microcomputer 100) is the hold storage means (first special figure hold storage unit 151A, second special figure hold storage unit 151B, special figure hold storage unit). 195) determining whether or not the determination result by the pre-determining means for each right stored is a determination result to be the specific display result or a determination result to be the specific variable display pattern;
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, not only when the determination result by the pre-determining means becomes the specific display result, but also when the determination result becomes the specific variable display pattern, the notice effect will be implemented, The expectation of the player can be increased.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment to which the present invention is applied. It is a side view which shows the structural example of a stick controller. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows various chance eyes. (A), (B), (C) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number for game counted on the main board side. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which illustrates a variation pattern classification. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit classification determination table. (A), (B) is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation pattern classification determination table. (A), (B), (C) is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation pattern classification determination table. (A), (B) is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number for production | presentation counted by the production | presentation control board side. (A) is a figure which shows the structural example of the table for continuous production determination, (B-1) is a figure which shows a normal reach ratio at the time of big hit, (B-2) shows a super reach ratio at the time of big hit FIG. It is a figure which shows various continuous production patterns and the content. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the table for continuous production type determination. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the table for continuous production pattern determination. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a continuous production stop determination table and a continuous production stop timing determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the movement determination table at the time of a fluctuation | variation start. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of an effect control pattern. FIG. 38 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of an effect control data holding area. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination process at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a figure which shows an example of the change aspect of the hold display in a continuous production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a pending | holding memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a continuous production start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design fluctuation | variation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a final stop symbol determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production setting process during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during decoration design change. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of a decoration symbol change completion. It is a figure which shows the movement aspect of a holding | maintenance display part. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement in a continuous production. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement in a continuous production. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement in a continuous production. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement in a continuous production. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement in a continuous production. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement in a continuous production. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement in a continuous production. It is a figure which shows the other example of a form. It is a figure which shows the other example of a form.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes). Special symbols (also referred to as “special graphics”), which are a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be displayed, are variably displayed (variable display). For example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B each variably display a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. To do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. There is no limitation, and for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns in which the combination of the LED to be turned on and the LED to be turned off in the 7-segment LED may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols. A plurality of special symbols are assigned symbol numbers corresponding thereto. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". .

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the image display device 5, the first special symbol variable display by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol variable display by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game respectively correspond to the variable display. For example, in a decorative symbol display area serving as a variable display section divided into a plurality of parts such as three, decorative symbols which are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) each identifiable are variably displayed. The variable display (variable display) of the decorative design is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. In response to the start of either the first special symbol change by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol change by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special game, ”,“ Middle ”, and“ right ”decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variation of decorative symbols (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction, update display by rotation, etc.) is started. Thereafter, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 are displayed. Then, the finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas are movable within the display area of the image display device 5 so that the decorative symbols can be displayed in a reduced or enlarged manner. May be.

  As described above, in the display area of the image display device 5, the special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or the special special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. In synchronization with the figure game, a variable display of a plurality of types of decorative patterns that can be identified is performed, and a fixed decorative pattern that is a variable display result is derived and displayed. In addition, for example, deriving and displaying various display symbols such as a special symbol and a decorative symbol means that identification information such as a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as a complete stop display or a final stop display) and the variable display is ended. . On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern until the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is derived and displayed, the variation speed of the decorative pattern becomes “0”, The symbol may be displayed in a stationary state, for example, in a display state that causes slight shaking or expansion / contraction. Such a display state is also called a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not displayed deterministically, the player can recognize that the variation of the decorative pattern due to the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. The temporary stop display may include displaying the decorative symbols completely stopped for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction.

  In the image display device 5, as the display areas to be the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, three areas may be provided so that they can be bonded or separated, or can be bonded and separated. . The display operation in the image display device 5 is controlled by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. When the first special symbol display device 4A is executing variable display of the first special diagram, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to perform effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol is displayed. When the variable display of the second special figure is executed on the display device 4B, the effect display is executed on the image display device 5 along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped.

  The decorative symbols variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R include, for example, eight types of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese characters). Numbers “1” to “8”, English letters “A” to “H”, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, characters or symbols and character images, etc. For example, it may be a decoration image showing a person, an animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a character, or any other figure. In addition to these eight types of decorative symbols, a blank symbol (a symbol that does not constitute a jackpot combination) may be included. A corresponding symbol number is assigned to each of the decorative symbols. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” are assigned to alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”, respectively. Note that the number of decorative symbols is not limited to eight, and may be any number as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a jackpot combination or a combination that is lost can be configured (for example, seven types or nine types).

  During the change of the decorative symbol, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right”, for example, from the smallest to the largest symbol number, sequentially from the top to the bottom. When the scrolling display is performed and the decorative symbol having the largest symbol number (for example, “8”) is displayed, the decorative symbol having the smallest symbol number (for example, “1”) is subsequently displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L), the symbols are scrolled from the largest symbol number to the smallest symbol symbol. When the decorative design having the smallest number is displayed, the decorative design having the largest design number may be displayed.

  At the position on the left side of the display area of the image display device 5, a first reserved memory number display accessory 5D for displaying the first reserved memory number is provided, and the first reserved memory number display accessory is displayed. On the right side of the display area of the image display device 5 facing 5D, a second reserved memory number display accessory 5U for displaying the second reserved memory number is provided. In the first reserved memory number display accessory 5D, the variable display hold number (special figure hold memory number) corresponding to the first special figure game is displayed so as to be specified, and in the second reserved memory number display accessory 5U, the first 2 Hold memory display is performed to display the variable display hold number (special figure hold memory number) corresponding to the 2 special figure game in an identifiable manner. Here, the variable display suspension corresponding to the first special figure game or the second special figure game is the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A or the second starting formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. A winning opening is generated based on a start winning when a game ball passes (enters). That is, the start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing a variable display game such as a special figure game or a variable display of decorative symbols has been established, but a variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. Corresponding to the established start condition when the start condition for starting the variable display game is not established due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state, etc. Variable display is held.

  As an example, the first reserved memory number display combination 5D and the second reserved storage number display combination 5U correspond to the first start prize opening and the second start prize opening based on the occurrence of the start prize. A plurality of display portions are provided that are lit from the bottom to the top in order from the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied, and the display color can be changed. Then, in the first reserved memory number display accessory 5D, the start of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A based on the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening. When the condition (first start condition) is satisfied, one of the display parts that are normally non-displayed (transparent color) (for example, among the display parts corresponding to the non-displayed first start winning opening) The display portion at the lower end is changed to the white display which is the normal display mode. After that, when the start condition (first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure is established, one of the first reserved memory number display actors 5D (for example, the display part which is displayed in white) The display part at the upper end of () is returned to non-display.

  Further, in the second reserved memory number display accessory 5U, the start of the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B based on the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. When the condition (second start condition) is satisfied, one of the display parts that are normally non-displayed (for example, the display part at the lower end of the display area corresponding to the second start winning opening that is not displayed) ) Is changed to the white display which is the normal display mode. After that, when the start condition (second start condition) of the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied, one of the second reserved memory number display actors 5U (for example, the display part that is displayed in white) The display part at the upper end of () is returned to non-display.

  The first reserved memory number display combination 5D and the second reserved storage number display combination 5U have four display units (hold display units) corresponding to the four reserved storages. , R (red), G (green), and B (blue), which are formed of an aggregate of a plurality of full-color LEDs, and various colors can be lit and displayed in a single color. A rainbow color display is possible by distinguishing and displaying a plurality of colors in different areas in the display unit.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 45, the first reserved memory number display accessory 5D and the second reserved memory number display accessory 5U are rectangular box-like movable objects, with the upper end position as a fulcrum. The first holding accessory motor 83 and the second holding accessory motor 84 that are pivotally supported and connected to the pivoting shaft that is pivotally supported overlap the display area of the image display device 5. Thus, it can be moved to various speeds and angles.

  In this embodiment, in order to be able to move the first reserved memory number display accessory 5D and the second reserved memory number display accessory 5U at a plurality of types of movement speeds and movement angles, A pulse motor is used as the first holding accessory motor 83 and the second holding accessory motor 84, and the operation angle control and the operation speed control of the first holding accessory motor 83 and the second holding accessory motor 84 are performed. Although it can be easily implemented by controlling the output state of the drive pulse output to each first holding accessory motor 83 or second holding accessory motor 84, the present invention is not limited to this. In order to simply move the first reserved memory number display combination 5D and the second reserved storage number display combination 5U, a solenoid or the like may be used, or a motor other than the pulse motor may be used.

  Moreover, you may make it provide the indicator which displays a special figure reserved memory number with these 1st reserved memory number display combination 5D and 2nd reserved memory number display combination 5U. In the example shown in FIG. 1, together with the first reserved memory number display combination 5D and the second reserved storage number display combination 5U, the upper part and the lower part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B are provided for displaying the special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first special figure hold memory number as the effective start winning ball number that has passed (entered) through the first start winning port formed by the normal winning ball device 6A in an identifiable manner. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second special figure hold memory number as an effective start winning ball number that has passed (entered) through the second start winning port formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B in an identifiable manner. Each of the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B has a number (for example, 4) corresponding to an upper limit value (for example, “4”) in each of the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number, for example. LED).

  Thus, although the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied, the special game started first is being executed, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. For this reason, when the start condition for starting the special figure game is not satisfied, variable display suspension corresponding to the special figure game occurs. For example, if the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is not satisfied when the first start condition is satisfied, the first special figure The number of reserved memories is incremented by 1 (incremented), and the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. In addition, when the second start condition is satisfied, if the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is not satisfied, the second special figure The reserved memory number is incremented by 1 (incremented), and execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the first special figure holding memory number is decremented by 1 (decrement), and the special figure game using the second special figure is executed. Is started, the second special figure reserved memory number is decremented by 1 (decremented).

  The variable display hold memory number obtained by adding the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number is also referred to as a total hold memory number. When simply referring to the “number of special figure hold memory”, it usually refers to a concept including any of the first special figure hold memory number, the second special figure hold memory number, and the total hold memory number. It may refer to a concept that includes the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number but excludes the total reserved memory number).

  In addition, in the display area of the image display device 5, special symbols variably displayed in a special symbol game executed by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B are separated from the decorative symbols. May be provided with a special symbol variable display area for display as identifiable. As an example, in response to the start of variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, the special symbols can be changed in the special symbol variable display area. Variation of the effect image indicating “「 ”,“ 「”, “×”, etc. corresponding to the display is started. Thereafter, in response to the fact that the special symbol variable display in the special symbol game is terminated and the confirmed special symbol is stopped, “◎” predetermined corresponding to the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol variable display area. It is only necessary to stop and display effect images such as “O” and “X”. For example, if the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game is a big hit symbol, “◎” is stopped and displayed in the special symbol variable display area, and if it is a small bonus symbol, “○” is stopped and displayed as a lost symbol. In some cases, “x” may be stopped and displayed.

  Below the image display device 5, an ordinary winning ball device 6A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning opening that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B has an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normal open state that is a vertical position and an expanded open state that is a tilt position by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided to form a second start winning opening. As an example, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the OFF state, so that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening. It is difficult to open normally. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the game ball passes through the second start winning opening by the tilt control in which the movable blade piece is tilted when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the ON state ( It will be in an expanded open state that is easy to enter. In the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, although the game ball can enter the second start winning opening even in the normal open state, there is a possibility that the game ball may enter more than in the expanded open state. You may comprise so that it may become low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B may be configured such that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening in the normally open state, for example, by closing the second starting winning opening.

  A game ball that has passed (entered) a first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. A game ball that has passed (entered) a second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, a second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first special figure holding memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “ 4 ") If the following, the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second special figure holding memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “ 4 ") If the following, the second start condition is satisfied. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B. May be the same number or different numbers.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door shown in FIG. 3, and changes into an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Forming a mouth. As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the off state, the special prize opening door closes the special prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door is in the ON state, the big prize opening door opens the big winning opening. A game ball that has passed (entered) through a special winning opening formed in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is detected by, for example, a count switch 23 shown in FIG.

  Based on the detection of game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) through the large winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, the gaming ball passes through other winning openings such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, for example. More prize balls are paid out than when passing (entering). Therefore, if the special prize winning device 7 is opened in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, the first state is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the special prize winning device 7 is closed in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, the game ball cannot pass through (enter) into the special prize winning opening, and therefore, the second disadvantageous to the player. It becomes a state.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbols. Is displayed (variably displayed) in a variable manner. Such variable display of normal symbols is called a general game (also referred to as “normal game”). The normal symbol display 20 variably displays, for example, a plurality of types of normal symbols composed of numbers indicating “0” to “9”, symbols indicating “−”, and the like. A plurality of types of normal symbols are assigned symbol numbers corresponding thereto. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. The normal symbol display 20 is not limited to the one that variably displays the numbers indicating “0” to “9” or the symbols indicating “−” as normal symbols. For example, “O” and “X” are displayed. Ordinary symbols are variably displayed by alternately lighting the decorative lamps (or LEDs) to be displayed, or by lighting a plurality of decorative lamps (or LEDs) such as “left”, “middle”, and “right” in a predetermined order. It may be a thing. Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general-purpose hold indicator 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general-purpose hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gate 41.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening, for example, one or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that a game ball that has entered one of the general prize openings is detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 is provided at the periphery of the game area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle only needs to be provided with a single shot switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping the driving of a shooting motor included in the hitting ball shooting device. At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. )) Is provided. Below the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a lower plate that holds (stores) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  A stick controller 30 that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a member that forms the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body (for example, a central portion of the lower plate). Yes. FIG. 2 shows a configuration example of the stick controller 30. The stick controller 30 includes an operation rod 30A held by the player, and a trigger button 31A is provided at a predetermined position of the operation rod 30A (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator is hooked when the player holds the operation rod 30A). Is provided. The trigger button 31A is used for a predetermined instruction operation by performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, index finger) while the player holds the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). What is necessary is just to be comprised so that. A trigger sensor 35A (see FIG. 3) for detecting a predetermined instruction operation by a push-pull operation on the trigger button 31A or the like may be built in the operation rod 30A. A tilt direction sensor unit 32 that detects a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod 30A may be provided inside the main body of the lower plate at the lower part of the stick controller 30. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit 32 includes two transmissive photosensors arranged in parallel to the board surface of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operation rod 30A when viewed from the player's side facing the pachinko gaming machine 1. 4) which is a combination of two parallel photo sensors (vertical sensor pairs) arranged perpendicularly to the surface of the game board 2 on the right side of the center position of the operating rod 30A when viewed from the player side. What is necessary is just to be comprised including the two transmission type photosensors. In addition, the attachment position of the stick controller 30 in a lower plate is not limited to the center part of a lower plate, The position approached to either the right or left may be sufficient.

  The member that forms the upper plate includes, for example, a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 30). Is provided. The push button 31B only needs to be configured to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor 35 </ b> B (see FIG. 3) that detects a player's operation act on the push button 31 </ b> B may be provided inside the upper plate body at the position where the push button 31 </ b> B is installed. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 1, the push button 31 </ b> B and the stick controller 30 are attached in the vertical position in the center portion of the upper plate and the lower plate. On the other hand, it is good also considering the attachment position of push button 31B and the stick controller 30 as the position which moved to either the right or left in an upper plate and a lower plate, maintaining the vertical positional relationship. Alternatively, the mounting position of the push button 31B and the stick controller 30 is not in a vertical positional relationship, but may be in a horizontal positional relationship, for example.

  The trigger button 31A provided on the stick controller 30 is configured such that the player can perform an instruction operation by pushing and pulling with an operating finger while the player holds the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 with an operating hand. Yes. On the other hand, the push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 that forms the upper plate separately from the stick controller 30, and the player does not hold the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30. In FIG. 2, the instruction operation can be performed by pressing the operation hand. Therefore, the trigger button 31A is difficult to perform a continuous hitting operation that is a continuous instruction operation compared to the push button 31B.

  In the normal game by the normal symbol display 20, the normal symbol display 20 shows that the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 provided in the game area is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. After the general chart start condition for executing variable display is established, based on the fact that the general chart start condition for starting variable display of normal symbols, such as the end of the previous general chart game, is established, Be started. In this normal game, after the normal symbol change is started, when a predetermined time as the normal symbol change time elapses, the fixed normal symbol that is a variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol), such as a number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “ordinary loss”. Become. Corresponding to the fact that the normal symbol variable display result is “per standard”, the expansion / release control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable tulip of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted. The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  In the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A, the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning port formed in the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first start port switch 22A shown in FIG. After the first start condition is established due to the above, it is started based on the fact that the first start condition is established, for example, due to the end of the last special game, the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. In the special game by the second special symbol display device 4B, the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning port formed in the normal variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second start port switch 22B shown in FIG. After the second start condition is satisfied due to the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, it is started based on the fact that the second special start game, the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state has ended, for example.

  In the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, after the special symbol variable display is started, the special symbol variable display result is obtained when a predetermined time as the special symbol variable time elapses. A definite special symbol (a special graph display result) is derived and displayed. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a “big hit” as the specific display result, and a predetermined special symbol (small bonus symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. If the special symbol different from the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the result is “lost”. After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state in which a round advantageous to the player (also referred to as “round game”) is executed a predetermined number of times. Further, after the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the game is controlled to the small hit game state different from the big hit game state.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment, as an example, the special symbol indicating the numbers “1”, “3”, and “7” is the big hit symbol, and the special symbol indicating the number “2” is the small hit symbol. , The special symbol indicating the symbol “−” is a lost symbol. It should be noted that each symbol such as a big win symbol, a small bonus symbol, or a lose symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Alternatively, a special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a big hit symbol, a small bonus symbol, or a lost symbol.

  Of the special symbols that show the numbers "1", "3", and "7" that will be jackpot symbols, the special symbols that show the numbers "3" and "7" will be the 15 round jackpot symbol, and the number "1" The special symbol shown will be a two-round jackpot symbol. In the big hit gaming state (15 round big hit state) as a multi-round specific game state controlled after the 15 round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the special prize winning ball door of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is controlled. However, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened by opening the large winning opening in a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) which is the first period or a period until a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls are generated. Is changed to a first state (open state) advantageous to the player. In this way, the special prize opening door that has opened the special prize opening during the round is received a special ball, which receives the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2 and then closes the special prize opening. The device 7 is changed to a second state (closed state) disadvantageous to the player, and one round is completed. In the 15 round big hit state, the number of executions of the round, which is the open cycle of the big prize opening, becomes the first round number (for example, “15”). A game in the 15 round big hit state in which the number of round executions is “15” is also referred to as a 15-time open game. In such a 15-round big hit state, every time a game ball wins a big winning opening 60, 15 balls (prize balls) are obtained. The 15 round round big hit state is also referred to as a first specific gaming state.

  In the big hit gaming state (two round big hit state) as a small round specific gaming state controlled after the two round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is played in each round. The second period (for example, 0.5 seconds) in which the period for changing to the first state advantageous to the player (the period in which the grand prize opening is opened by the grand prize opening door) is shorter than the first period in the 15 round big hit state It becomes. In the 2 round big hit state, the number of executions of the round becomes a second round number (for example, “2”) smaller than the first round number in the 15 round big hit state. Note that in the 2 round big hit state, it is only necessary to control the number of executions of the round to be the second round number, and other control may be performed in the same manner as the 15 round big hit state. A game in the round two big hit state in which the number of round executions is “2” is also referred to as a two-time open game. In the two-round big hit state, in a predetermined winning ball apparatus provided separately from the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 in each round, by changing a predetermined winning opening serving as a big winning opening from a closed state to an open state, etc. The second state that is disadvantageous to the player may be changed to the first state that is advantageous to the player, and the state may be returned to the second state after a predetermined period (the first period or the second period) has elapsed.

  In such a two-round big hit state, 15 game balls (prize balls) can be obtained if a game ball wins a big winning opening, but the opening period of the big winning opening is the second period (0.5 seconds). It is very short. Therefore, the two-round big hit state is a big hit gaming state in which a ball (prize ball) cannot be obtained substantially. The 2 round big hit state is also referred to as a second specific gaming state. In addition, the big hit gaming state as the low round specific gaming state is not limited to the number of round execution times compared to the big hit gaming state as the multiple round specific gaming state. For example, the round execution number is small round specific gaming state. While the state and the multi-round specific gaming state are the same, in the small-round specific gaming state, the upper limit period (for example, 2 seconds) for opening the big prize opening is the upper limit period for the multi-round specific gaming state (for example, 29 seconds) ) May be shorter. That is, the big hit gaming state as the small round specific gaming state is that the period in which the big prize opening is changed to the open state in each round is a second period shorter than the first period in the multi-round specific gaming state, The number of executions may be at least one of the second round numbers less than the first round number in the multi-round specific gaming state.

  Further, among the special symbols indicating the numbers “3” and “7” which are the big hit symbols of 15 rounds, the special symbol indicating the number “3” is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special game 15 After the round big hit state is over, as one of the special game states, time reduction control (time reduction control) in which the variable symbol variable display time (special figure variation time) in the special figure game is shortened compared to the normal state. Controlled to short state when done. Here, the normal state is a normal game state as a game state different from a specific game state such as a big hit game state, a probability change state, and a short time state, and an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a system reset is performed). As in the case where the initialization process is performed after the power is turned on, the same control is performed. If the time-short state is terminated when any of the conditions of the special game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) and the variable display result is “big hit” is satisfied first, Good. Like the special symbol indicating the number “3”, the 15-round jackpot symbol that is controlled to the short-time state after the jackpot gaming state based on the fact that it is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game is not probable. It is called a jackpot symbol (also called “normal jackpot symbol”). Further, the fact that the non-probability variable big hit symbol out of the 15 round big hit symbols is stopped and displayed and the variable display result becomes “big hit” is called “15R non-probable big hit” (also referred to as “15R normal big hit”).

  Out of the special symbols that indicate the numbers of “3” and “7” that will be the big hit symbol of 15 rounds, the special symbol that shows the number of “7” is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game. After the status is over, or after the 2 round jackpot state has ended based on the special symbol showing the number “1” that will be the 2 round jackpot symbol being stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special game, As one of the special game states different from the normal state, for example, the probability variation state (high probability state) in which the probability variation control (probability variation control) is continuously performed together with the short time control in which the special figure variation time is shortened compared to the normal state. Be controlled. In this probabilistic state, the variable display result of each special figure game and decorative design is improved so that the probability that the variable display result will be “big hit” and further controlled to the big hit gaming state will be higher than in the normal state and the short-time state. To do. Such a probability change state continues until the next variable display result is a “big hit”, regardless of the number of executions of the special game. Like the special symbol indicating the number “7”, the 15-round jackpot symbol that is controlled to be probable after the jackpot game state based on being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game is It is called a symbol. Like the special symbol indicating the number “1”, the two-round big hit symbol controlled to the probable change state after the big hit gaming state based on being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game is a sudden big hit symbol. It is called. Further, the fact that the probability variable big hit symbol of the 15 round big hit symbols is stopped and displayed and the variable display result becomes “big hit” is called “15R probability big hit”. The fact that the sudden hit symbol is stopped and displayed and the variable display result is “big hit” is referred to as “surprise big hit” (also referred to as “2R probability variable big hit”). The 15 round jackpot symbols “3” and “7” and the 2 round jackpot symbol “1” are examples, and each jackpot symbol is not limited to these. For example, in order to prevent the player from recognizing the jackpot symbol or the type of jackpot, the jackpot symbol may not be a number but may be a predetermined symbol (for example, “co”).

  After the special symbol indicating the number “2” as the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the small hit game state is controlled. In this small hit game state, similarly to the two round big hit state, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 performs a variable winning operation for changing the big winning opening to the first state (open state) advantageous to the player. That is, in the small hit gaming state, for example, the operation of setting the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state (open state) for the second period is repeatedly executed until the second number of times (the number of executions equal to the second round number) is reached. Is done. In the small hit gaming state, as in the two round big hit state, the period during which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in the first state is the second period, and the number of executions of the operation in the first state is the second. Control may be performed so that at least one of the number of times is performed. After the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state is not changed, and the game state before the variable display result becomes “small hit” is continuously controlled. However, if the number of executions of the special figure game in the special gaming state has reached a predetermined number when the special figure game with the variable display result of “small hit” is executed, after the end of the small hit gaming state, The special gaming state may end and return to the normal state. A game in the small hit gaming state in which the number of times that the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is set to the first state by the variable winning operation is “2” is also referred to as a two-time open game, similar to the game in the two round big hit state. When the winning ball device provided separately from the special variable winning ball device 7 in each round in the two round big hit state is changed to the first state, the same as the two round big hit state in the small hit gaming state. In the aspect, the winning ball apparatus may be changed to the first state.

  In the probabilistic state or the short time state, the normal symbol display unit 20 controls the normal symbol in the normal symbol game so that the variation time of the normal symbol (ordinary symbol variation time) is shorter than that in the normal state. Control for improving the probability that the display result is “per normal figure” than in the normal state, and tilt control of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the variable display result is “per normal figure”. The game ball can easily pass (enter) the second start winning opening, such as a control to make the tilt control time for performing longer than that in the normal state, and a control to increase the number of tilts than in the normal state. Control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility that the start condition is satisfied. It should be noted that any one of these controls may be performed in the probability variation state or the short time state, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. As described above, the control that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening in the probability changing state or the short-time state is also referred to as high opening control. By performing the high opening control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening becomes the expanded opening state is higher than when the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second starting condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B can be easily established, and the special figure game can be executed frequently. In addition, the time until the variable display result becomes “big hit” is shortened. Therefore, in the probability variation state and the short time state, it becomes easier to enter the big hit gaming state than in the normal state. The period during which the high opening control can be executed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to either the certain change state or the short-time state. . Further, it is also said that the gaming state is in the high base during the high opening control period. On the other hand, when it is not the high opening control period, it is said that the gaming state is in the low base. The time-short state in this embodiment is a gaming state that is also referred to as a low-probability high-base state, and the normal state is a gaming state that is also referred to as a low-probability low-base state. The latent probability changing state which is a state is a gaming state which is also referred to as a high probability low base state.

  Probability change states include not only those with time-varying control and high-opening control, but also those with time-varying control and high-opening control (latent probability changing). Also good. As an example, after the end of the 15 round big hit state based on the fact that the variable display result in the special figure game is “15R probable big hit”, the first probable state (high accuracy (Also called a high base state). After that, when the number of executions of the special figure game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times) without the special figure display result being “big hit”, the probability variation control is continuously performed, but the time reduction control or the high opening control is performed. It is also possible to control to a second certain variation state (also referred to as a high certainty low base state) that is not performed after the completion of. In addition, after the end of the two round big hit state based on the fact that the variable display result in the special game is “surprise big hit” in the normal state, the state shifts to the second probability variation state (latency probability variation state), Only the probability variation control may be performed, and the time reduction control or the high opening control may not be performed. On the other hand, after the end of the two round big hit state based on the fact that the variable display result in the special figure game is “surprise big hit” when in the probability changing state or the short time state, the state shifts to the first probability changing state, Short time control and high opening control may be performed together with the probability variation control. Alternatively, after the 15-round big hit state based on “15R probable big hit”, the control is made to the first positive change state until the special figure display result becomes “big hit” again, while the 2-round big hit state based on “surprise big hit” After the completion of, the transition to the first certain change state is made, and when the number of executions of the special figure game reaches a predetermined number without the special figure display result being “big hit”, the second certain change state is entered. It may be. While the short-time control and the high-open control are started and ended simultaneously (interlocked), the start and end of the probability variation control is not necessarily linked to the start and end of the short-time control and high-open control. May be.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and In response to the start of any of the special figure games using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B, the decorative symbol variable display (variable display) is started. Is done. The period from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the end of variable display due to the stop display of the fixed decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R Then, the variable display state of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach state. Here, the reach state means a decorative design (“reach” which is not yet temporarily stopped when the decorative design temporarily displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 forms a part of the jackpot combination. "Varying symbol") is a display state in which the variation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination is there. Specifically, in some of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R) in advance. The remaining decorative symbol display area (for example, “medium”) that has not yet been temporarily stopped when the decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol indicating the alphanumeric character “7”) constituting the determined jackpot combination is temporarily stopped is displayed. ) In the display state in which the decorative symbols are fluctuating, or all or part of the decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Is a display state that fluctuates synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination.

  Further, in response to the reach state, the variation speed of the decorative design is reduced, or a character image (an effect image simulating a person) different from the decorative design is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. Or changing the display mode of the background image, playing and displaying a moving image that is different from the decorative design, or changing the variation mode of the decorative design, performing a different rendering operation than before reaching the reach state May be. Such effect operations such as display of the character image, change of the display mode of the background image, reproduction display of the moving image, and change of the decorative pattern change mode are referred to as reach effect display (or simply reach effect). In the reach effect, not only the display operation in the image display device 5 but also the sound output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation (flashing operation) in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9, and the movable object such as the shutter. Or the like may be included in an operation mode different from the operation mode before entering the reach state. As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Each reach mode has a different possibility of “big hit” (also referred to as “reliability” or “big hit reliability”). That is, it is possible to vary the possibility that the variable display result will be a “hit” depending on which of the multiple types of reach effects is executed. As an example, in this embodiment, reach modes such as normal reach, super reach α, and super reach β are preset. And, when the reach form of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β appears, the possibility that the variable display result will be “big hit” compared to the case where the reach form of normal reach appears (expected degree of big hit) Becomes higher.

  During the variable display of decorative designs, unlike the reach effect, the decorative display variable display state may become the reach state, and the variable display result may be a “hit”. There may be a case where a variable display effect for notifying the player is given by a variable display mode of the symbol or the like. In this embodiment, variable display effects such as “sliding” and “pseudo-continuous” can be executed, and each effect operation is executed in response to a change pattern being determined on the main board 11 side. Or not is determined.

  In the variable display effect of “sliding”, two or more decorative symbol display areas are displayed after changing the decorative symbols in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. After temporarily displaying the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R (for example, “left” and “right”), a predetermined number (for example, “1” or “2”) decorative symbol display area (for example, one or both of the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L and the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R), and after changing the decorative symbol again, stop display. Thus, the effect display for changing the decorative design to be stopped is performed.

  In the “pseudo-ream” variable display effect, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in response to one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special figure game being satisfied once. Before the final determined decorative symbol is derived and displayed, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The effect display in which the decorative symbols are changed again (pseudo-variable) in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R can be performed a predetermined number of times (for example, up to three times). The number of quasi-continuous fluctuations is displayed for the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, excluding the first variation after all decorative symbols are temporarily suspended after the decorative symbol variable display starts. This is the number of times that the decorative symbols re-variate in all of the areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. As an example, in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, a special combination pseudo as shown in FIG. 4A is displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. A decorative symbol that is one of a plurality of types of lost combinations predetermined as the consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is temporarily stopped and displayed. Here, the “left symbol” shown in FIG. 4A or the like is a decorative symbol temporarily displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, and the “middle symbol” is a “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C. The “right symbol” is a decorative symbol displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. In the temporary stop display, while the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol is displayed to the player by, for example, performing a variable swing display or immediately changing the decorative symbol again only by stopping for a short time. What is necessary is just to alert | report that the decoration design which is not decided. Alternatively, even in the temporary stop display, the decorative design may be changed again after the decorative design is stopped to the extent that the player recognizes that the displayed decorative design has been confirmed.

  In the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, the variable display result may be set so that the possibility that the variable display result becomes “big hit” increases as the number of pseudo-continuous changes (re-changes) increases. Accordingly, the player can recognize that the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is performed by temporarily stopping display of any one of the pseudo-continuous chances GC1 to GC8, and the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations increases. Accordingly, the expectation that the variable display result becomes “big hit” is enhanced. In this embodiment, in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once by performing the pseudo-continuous change (re-change) once to three times. Based on this, it is possible to make it appear as if the variable display of the decorative symbols has been started 2 to 4 times in succession. Note that the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations (re-variations) in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect may be executed more than one to three times, for example, four or five times.

  When the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed, the display is re-variable due to the related display effect and the movement of a movable object such as a shutter, etc., with multiple variable displays (pseudo-continuous variation) including the initial variation. An effect may be executed. As an example, during the period of each variable display (including initial variation) by the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, one that is lit among a plurality of decorative LEDs provided inside or outside the game area is 1 It may be controlled to increase one by one. In addition, the display color of the decoration LED may be controlled to change during the period of each variable display (including the first time variation), or the lighting LED among the plurality of decoration LEDs may change. May be controlled. As another example, during each variable display (including initial fluctuation) by the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, a movable object such as a shutter, or an effect model (movable) inside or outside the game area Member) may be controlled to operate. As yet another example, the image display device 5 is controlled to display a predetermined effect image such as a specific character image during each variable display (including initial variation) by the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”. May be. In addition to some or all of these re-variation effects, or in place of some or all of these re-change effects, lighting and blinking of decorative LEDs, operation of the effect model, display of effect images The re-variation effect may be executed by combining some or all of them. At this time, a case where a re-variation effect combining a plurality of types of effect modes is included, or a case where a re-change effect is performed a plurality of times, rather than a case where a re-variation effect is executed with only one type of effect mode. In the case where the effect mode changes, the possibility that the variable display result becomes “big hit”, the possibility of “15R probability variable big hit”, and the like may increase.

  The production operation executed as the re-variation production may include any production operation such as sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and lighting operation of other light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9. Also, for example, differences in the output of sound and sound effects from the speakers 8L, 8R, differences in the movement of the production target object (eg, production model, etc.) (differences in operating speed, differences in operating distance, differences in operating direction, etc.) Depending on the movement of the character image displayed on the image display device 5 (difference in movement speed, difference in movement distance, difference in movement direction, etc.) The effect mode in the re-variation effect may be made different by changing the character display instead of the image or changing the display of the background image. Further, in addition to the re-variation effect executed during the variation of the decorative symbol, for example, when the decorative symbol that is one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is temporarily stopped, for example, audio output from the speakers 8L, 8R, The player may be able to recognize that the chance eye has been temporarily stopped and displayed by an arbitrary production operation such as the lighting operation of the light emitter such as the effect lamp 9.

  In addition to “slip” and “pseudo ream”, variable display effects using the variable display operation of such decorative patterns include, for example, “Development chance eyes”, “Development chance eyes end”, “Slip after chance eyes stop” Various production operations such as these may be executed. Here, in the variable display effect of “Development Opportunity”, “Left”, “Middle”, “Right” from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the display of the fixed decorative pattern resulting in the variable display result. In all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbols constituting the development chances included in the predetermined special combination are temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the decorative symbol variable display state is reached. A predetermined reach production is started. As a result, when the decorative symbol constituting the development opportunity is temporarily stopped, the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state, and the variable display result becomes “big hit” after the reach state is reached. Expectation is enhanced. Further, in the variable display effect of “end of development chance”, after the decorative display variable display is started, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are all displayed. Then, an effect display is performed in which a decorative pattern having a predetermined combination as an opportunity for development is derived and displayed as a confirmed decorative pattern. In the variable display effect of “slip after the chance stop”, as with the variable display effect of “pseudo ream”, after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is derived and displayed. , “Left”, “Middle”, “Right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped temporarily for the decorative combination (special combination) that is one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. After the display, unlike the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, the effect display that changes the decorative symbol to be stopped by changing the decorative symbol again in a part of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Is done.

  During variable display of decorative designs, unlike reach display or variable display effects such as “slip” and “pseudo-run”, for example, displaying a predetermined effect image, displaying a message as an image, outputting sound, etc. As described above, there is a possibility that the variable display state of the decorative design may reach a reach state due to a presentation operation different from the variable display operation of the decorative design, and that the variable display result may be a “hit”. A notice effect may be executed to notify the player. The effect operation that becomes the notice effect is the variable display state of the decorative symbol after the decorative symbol variable display is started in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. May be executed (started) prior to the reach state (before the decorative symbols are temporarily displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R). In addition, the notice effect that notifies that the variable display result may be a “big hit” may include one that is executed after the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state.

  In the “character display” notice effect, during the variable display of the decorative pattern, for example, an effect display in which one of a plurality of types of character images prepared in advance is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 is performed. In the “step-up display” notice effect, during the variable display of the decorative design, for example, an effect display that switches and displays a plurality of types of effect images prepared in advance in a predetermined order in the display area of the image display device 5. An effect operation may be performed in which the effect mode changes (steps up) in a plurality of stages. In the notice effect of “step-up display”, after any one of a plurality of types of effect images prepared in advance (for example, an effect image that is displayed first in a predetermined order) is displayed, the effect image The effect display in the notice effect may be terminated without switching. In addition, instead of the effect display for switching the effect image to be displayed, or along with such an effect display, for example, the effect mode is caused by an effect operation in which a movable member for effect is operated in a plurality of types of operation modes in a predetermined order. An effect operation that changes (steps up) in a plurality of stages may be performed.

  The notice effect that can be stepped up is a special symbol or decorative symbol that is executed in response to one start prize (that one game ball has entered the first start prize slot or the second start prize slot). Is a kind of notice effect that is executed during variable display, and in particular, a step in which the aspect of the notice (effect contents by display, sound, lamp, shutter and other movable objects and movable members) changes (steps up) in a plurality of stages. It is also called up notice. In general, the greater the number of stages (number of steps) that change, the higher the reliability (the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit”). Further, depending on the number of steps in the step-up notice effect or the effect mode at each step, it becomes “15R probability variation big hit” or “2R probability variation big hit”, a specific reach effect is executed, “15R non-probable variation” Of the promotion from “big hit” to “15R probable big hit”, at least one of them may be notified in advance. Further, the object to be notified may be changed according to the number of times of change (number of steps). For example, “reach determination” may be performed when going to the second step, “super reach confirmation” when going to the third step, and “big hit confirmation” going to the fourth step. As the change of the notice mode (step-up), different character images may be displayed in order, or the step-up may be performed by changing the shape or color of one character. May be. That is, it is only necessary to be able to recognize that the state of the notice means (display, sound, lamp, movable object, etc.) as viewed from the player changes stepwise.

  In the pre-announcement effect that becomes the operation system advance notice such as “single push button”, “single push button”, “single trigger button”, and “trigger trigger button”, a predetermined effect that is a button operation promotion effect during variable display of decorative symbols The operation may be performed. In the button operation promotion effect, for example, an effect image such as a character image or a message image prepared in advance is displayed at a predetermined position in the display area of the image display device 5 to operate the push button 31B or the trigger button 31A by the player. It is only necessary to provide a production operation that prompts The effect operation that prompts the player to perform an operation is not limited to an effect that causes the image display device 5 to display an effect image. The effect that causes a predetermined sound to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED are predetermined. The lighting pattern may be turned on or blinking, the production model provided inside or outside the game area may be operated in a predetermined operation mode, or any of these may be combined. When such a button operation promotion effect is performed, it becomes an operation effective period during which an operation action by the player is detected effectively. Then, in response to the detection of the operation action by the player within the operation effective period, for example, one of the plurality of types of effect images prepared in advance is displayed on the image display device 5, Various effect operations such as outputting sound effects corresponding to any one of the prepared voice patterns from the speakers 8L and 8R are executed.

  In the notice effect of “single push button” or “single trigger button”, a predetermined instruction operation by the player (for example, pressing operation of the push button 31B or pushing operation of the trigger button 31A) is detected once within the operation effective period. Based on this, the effect mode (effect content) in the notice effect changes. For example, when the operation is detected, the shutter operates. On the other hand, when the operation is not detected, the image display device 5 displays the image shutter. Thereafter, even if an instruction operation by the player is detected, it is only necessary to perform control so that a change in the production mode corresponding to the detection result does not occur. Alternatively, when the instruction operation by the player is detected once, the operation valid period may be ended so that the instruction operation by the player is not detected thereafter.

  In the notice effect of “push button repeated hits” or “trigger button repeat hits”, a predetermined instruction operation (for example, pressing operation of the push button 31B or pushing operation of the trigger button 31A) by the player is detected within the operation effective period. Based on the number of times and the like, the effect mode (effect content) in the notice effect changes. For example, when the operation detection is performed a predetermined number of times or more, the shutter operates. On the other hand, when the operation detection is not performed a predetermined number of times or more, the image display device 5 displays the image shutter. Further, every time an instruction operation by the player is detected, the effect mode in the notice effect is changed little by little so that the degree of change in the effect mode is changed according to the number of times the instruction operation is detected. good. Or you may make it vary the grade which an effect | action aspect changes according to the total frequency | count of instruction | indication operation detected within predetermined time.

  Also, in the notice effect of “trigger button single shot” or “trigger button repeated hit”, the effect mode (effect contents) in the notice effect changes according to the tilting operation of the stick controller 30 with respect to the operating rod 30A. For example, when a tilting operation by the player is detected, a switch display of effect images corresponding to the detected tilting direction, specifically, the displayed character moves or the character changes according to the tilting operation. By performing a switching effect such as performing an effect, the effect mode by displaying the effect image changes. Therefore, in the notice effect of “single trigger button” or “trigger trigger button repeated”, the effect manner in the notice effect changes according to the tilting operation of the stick controller 30 with respect to the operating rod 30A and the instruction operation with respect to the trigger button 31A. On the other hand, in the notice effect of “single push button” or “push button push”, the effect aspect in the notice effect changes according to the instruction operation to the push button 31B.

  An effect operation in which the effect mode changes according to the tilting operation with respect to the operating rod 30A of the stick controller 30 and an instruction operation with respect to the trigger button 31A, and an effect operation in which the effect mode changes according to the instruction operation with respect to the push button 31B are: The present invention is not limited to the notice effect, but may be executed as a reach effect or a re-change effect that is executed in response to a change pattern, for example.

  Separately from these notice effects, the first reserved memory number display combination 5D and the second reserved storage number display combination 5U carry out a continuous effect informing the possibility of a big hit or super reach. In this embodiment, as will be described later, when a valid start winning occurs, a random number corresponding to the effective start winning is extracted and a lottery such as whether or not it is a big hit or super reach is performed. When the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number, which is the establishment of the conditions for performing the continuous performance, is 4, based on the lottery result of the effective start winning that the reserved memory number is 4, By changing the display mode of the reserved storage display corresponding to the effective start winning prize to the blue display, the red display, and the rainbow display, which are special display modes different from the white display that is the normal display mode, It is suggested that

  If a special symbol that will be a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special symbol game, the decorative symbol variable display state will not reach the reach state after the variable symbol variable display starts. There are cases in which a fixed decorative symbol that is a non-reach combination is stopped and displayed. Such a decorative display variable display mode is referred to as “non-reach” (also referred to as “unreach loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol that becomes a losing symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, it corresponds to the fact that the decorative symbol variable display state has reached the reach state after the decorative symbol variable display has started. Then, after the reach effect is executed, a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined reach combination (also referred to as reach lose combination) may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the decorative design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”) when the variable display result is “losing”. Note that the fixed decorative pattern that is a non-reach combination and the fixed decorative pattern that is a reach combination are collectively referred to as a fixed decorative pattern of a lost combination (non-specific combination).

  When the special symbol indicating the number “3”, which is a non-probable variable jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special symbol game as a 15-round jackpot symbol, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is changed. Corresponding to the reach state, after a predetermined reach effect is executed, a definite decorative symbol that becomes a predetermined non-probable variation big hit combination (also referred to as “normal big hit combination”) is stopped and displayed. Here, the confirmed decorative symbols that are non-probable big hit combinations are, for example, symbol numbers that are variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. Among the decorative symbols “1” to “8”, any one of the decorative symbols whose symbol numbers are an even number “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” is “left”, “middle”, What is necessary is just to be able to be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In this way, the decorative symbols having the even number “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” constituting the non-probable variation big hit combination are referred to as non-probable variation symbols (also referred to as “normal symbols”). . Then, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becoming an uncertain variable big hit symbol, after the predetermined reach effect is executed, the fixed decorative symbol of the non-probable big hit combination is stopped and displayed. The variable display mode is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as a jackpot type) of “non-probable change” (also referred to as “normal jackpot”) when the variable display result is “big hit”. Thus, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the variable display mode of “non-probability change”, the game is controlled to the 15 round big hit gaming state, and when the 15 round big hit state is finished, the short time state is controlled.

  When the special symbol indicating the number “7”, which is the probability variable big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special figure game as a 15-round big hit symbol, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is reached. Corresponding to the situation, after reaching the same reach effect as when the jackpot type is "non-probable change", or the reach effect different from when the jackpot type is "non-probable change" For example, after the process is executed, a fixed decorative symbol that becomes a predetermined probability variation jackpot combination may be stopped and displayed. Here, the confirmed decorative symbol that is a probable big hit combination has, for example, a symbol number variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. Among the decorative patterns of “1” to “8”, any one of the decorative patterns having the odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, “7” is “left”, “middle”, “ What is necessary is just to be able to be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In this way, the decorative symbols having odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” constituting the probability variation big hit combination are referred to as probability variation symbols. Then, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becoming a probable big hit symbol, after the reach effect is executed, the decorative display variable display mode in which the definite decorative combination of the probable big hit combination is stopped is displayed. This is referred to as a variable display mode of “probability change” (also referred to as a big hit type) when the variable display result is “big hit”.

  When the probability variable big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol in the special figure game, the fixed decorative symbol that is a non-probable variable big hit combination may be stopped and displayed as a variable display result of the decorative symbol. In this way, even when the fixed decorative symbol that is a non-probable big hit combination is stopped and displayed, if the probable big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol in the special figure game, it is included in the variable display mode of “probable change”. . Thus, after the variable display result becomes “big hit” by the variable display mode of “probability change”, it is controlled to the 15 round big hit state, and when the 15 round big hit state ends, it is controlled to the positive change state. The confirmed decorative symbol that is a non-probable big hit combination and the definite decorative symbol that is a probable big hit combination are also collectively referred to as a definitive decorative symbol of a big winning combination (specific combination).

  During the variable display of the decorative symbol in which the confirmed decorative symbol is a non-probable variation jackpot combination or a certain variation jackpot combination, a re-lottery effect may be executed as a kind of certain variation promotion effect. In the re-lottery effect, after the decorative symbols that are the non-probable big hit combinations are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5, for example, “ In the left, middle, and right decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the same decorative pattern is changed again, and the decorative pattern (probable variable pattern) that is a combination of the probabilistic big hit and non-variable is displayed. One of the decorative symbols (non-probable variable symbols) that is a probable big hit combination is stopped and displayed as a final decorative symbol (final stop display). Here, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the big hit type is “non-probable change”, as the re-lottery effect, the confirmed decoration that becomes the non-probable big hit combination after re-changing the temporarily stopped display decorative pattern A change promotion promotion effect that derives and displays a symbol is performed. On the other hand, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the big hit type is “probable change”, as the re-lottery effect, the definite decoration that becomes the probable big hit combination after re-variation of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern The changing promotion success effect during the stop display of the symbol may be executed, or the changing promotion failure effect during the change may be executed. Such a re-lottery effect including a changing promotion failure effect and a changing promotion success effect is also referred to as a changing promotion effect.

  After the definitive decorative symbol that is a non-probable jackpot combination is derived and displayed, at the start of the jackpot gaming state or during execution of the round in the jackpot gaming state, the next round will start after any round ends in the jackpot gaming state During the big hit, which is a notification effect on whether or not to control to the probable change state in the period until the start, the period from the end of the last round in the big hit gaming state to the start of the next variable display game, etc. A promotion effect may be executed. Note that a notification effect similar to the jackpot promotion effect may be executed during the first variable display game after the end of the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot promotion effect that is executed after the final round in the jackpot game state is particularly called “ending promotion effect”. Such a jackpot promotion effect is also a kind of probable promotion effect.

  In the jackpot promotion effect, there is no jackpot promotion success effect informing that there is a promotion in which the game state becomes a probabilistic state even though the confirmed decoration pattern is a non-probable big hit combination, and there is no promotion in a promiscuous state There is a promotion promotion failure during jackpot. For example, in the jackpot promotion effect, the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 and either the non-probable variable symbol or the probable variable symbol is stopped and displayed as the effect display result, or the decorative symbol variable display What is necessary is just to alert | report so that a player can recognize the presence or absence of the promotion which will be in a probability change state by displaying the effect image different from.

  As such fluctuating promotion effects and jackpot promotion effects, for example, one of a plurality of types of probable promotion effects such as “single push button”, “push push button”, “single trigger button”, “trigger trigger button” is selected. May be set to be executable. That is, an effect operation in which the effect mode changes in accordance with the tilting operation on the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 and an instruction operation on the trigger button 31A, or an effect operation in which the effect mode changes in response to an instruction operation on the push button 31B, It may be executed as a promotion effect during change or a promotion effect during jackpot.

  As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, a special symbol indicating the number “1” which is a two-round big hit symbol is stopped or displayed, or a special symbol indicating the number “2” which is a small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. In such a case, the variable display state of the decorative symbols does not reach the reach state. For example, a combination of a plurality of types of fixed decorative symbols predetermined as the second opening chances TC1 to TC4 as shown in FIG. One of the above may be stopped. In addition, when the special symbol indicating the number “1”, which is a two-round jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbol is changed to the reach state. Then, after a predetermined reach effect is executed, a fixed decorative symbol that becomes a predetermined reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fact that the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becomes a special symbol indicating the number of “1” which is a two-round jackpot symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbols in which various fixed ornament symbols are stopped and displayed is variable. This is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as a jackpot type) of “surprise accuracy” (also referred to as “surprising accuracy hit” or “sudden probability change big hit”) when the display result is “big hit”. Thus, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the variable display mode of “surprise accuracy”, it is controlled to the two round big hit state, and when the two round big hit state is finished, it is controlled to the probability changing state.

  When the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “accuracy”, the accuracy mode start effect may be executed during variable display of the decorative symbols. In the surprise mode start effect, a predetermined effect operation is performed in response to the big hit type being “Accuracy”. After the surprise mode start effect is performed, an effect mode different from the normal effect mode called the accuracy mode may be started. In addition, the random mode start effect is not limited to the effect operation that is executed during the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols, and continues from the variable display even during part or all of the period of the two round big hit state. An effect operation may be performed. When the suddenness mode start effect is started, the decorative symbol that is variably displayed may be erased, and after the suddenness mode start effect is executed, the confirmed decorative symbol may not be derived and displayed. In the sudden accuracy mode, for example, until the variable display result is “big hit” and the probability variation state ends, the effect in the sudden accuracy mode is performed. In the effect in the sudden accuracy mode, the display mode of the background image in the display area of the image display device 5 is different from the display mode in the normal rendering mode, and is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the variable display of the decorative pattern The sound to be different from the sound in the normal effect mode, the lighting pattern of the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED to be different from the lighting pattern in the normal effect mode, or a part of these Alternatively, by combining all of them, it may be informed so that the player can recognize that the mode is inaccuracy.

  In the probability variation state, for example, an effect image for notifying that the probability variation state is “being probability variation” is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, or the background image or the decorative pattern display mode in the display region of the image display device 5 is displayed. May be different from the display mode in the normal effect mode, for example, so that the player can recognize that the player is in the probability change state. Alternatively, in the probability variation state, for example, the player may be unable to recognize or difficult to recognize that the probability variation state is caused by the same effect mode as in the normal state or the short time state (so-called latent probability variation). . It can be said that during the period in which such a latent probability change is performed, the gaming state is in the latent probability change.

  In these latent probability changes and normal states, for example, by changing the display mode of the image display device 5 to a display mode of a plurality of modes such as a day mode, a dusk mode, and a night mode, You may make it alert | report to a person. In this case, for example, when the latent probability is not changed, the day mode is easily selected and the night mode is hardly selected, and when the latent probability is changed, the day mode is hardly selected and the night mode is easily selected. The possibility of a latent probability change may be increased in the order of daytime mode, dusk mode, and night mode.

  In addition, these daytime mode, dusk mode, and night mode can be selected by, for example, lottery of “move to higher”, “do not move”, and “move to lower” every time a special game is executed. Even if it is a latent probability change, it may be changed (shifted) from the night mode to the dusk mode or the daytime mode, or may be changed (shifted) from the daytime mode to the dusk mode or the night mode.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are disposed on the back surface of the game board 2 and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 11 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and thereby the first special diagram and the second special diagram. Variable display of a predetermined display pattern such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 or controlling the variable symbol display of the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinction / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a function to control. The main board 11 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110 that receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits the detection signals to the game control microcomputer 100, and the game control microcomputer 100. A solenoid circuit 111 that transmits a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 81 and 82 is mounted.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R. Various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by the electrical components for rendering such as the shutter motors 36H and 36L and the game effect lamp 9 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 includes all or part of the display operation in the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, all or part of the on / off operation in the game effect lamp 9, etc., the shutter operation. A function of determining the control content for causing the electrical component for production to execute a predetermined production operation, such as all or a part of

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs sound from the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. For example, a processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and is turned on / off in the game effect lamp 9 and the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. A lamp driver circuit for driving is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the main board 11 is connected to wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22 </ b> A, the second start port switch 22 </ b> B, and the count switch 23. The gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 have an arbitrary configuration that can detect a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor. What is necessary is just to have. In addition, the main board 11 includes a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a normal symbol display device 20, a first hold display device 25A, a second hold display device 25B, and a general drawing hold display device 25C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The main board 11 is provided with a main board side connector corresponding to, for example, the relay board 15, and an output buffer circuit is connected between the main board side connector and the game control microcomputer 100. The output buffer circuit can pass a signal only in the direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15, and prevents the signal input from the relay board 15 to the main board 11. Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 12 or the relay board 15 side to the main board 11 side.

  The relay board 15 only needs to be provided with a transmission direction regulation circuit for each wiring for transmitting a control signal from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, for example. Each transmission direction regulation circuit includes a diode having an anode connected to the main board connector corresponding to the main board 11 and a cathode connected to the presentation control board connector corresponding to the presentation control board 12, and one end connected to the cathode of the diode. And a resistor having the other end connected to the ground (GND). With this configuration, each transmission direction regulating circuit can prevent the signal from being input from the effect control board 12 to the relay board 15 and pass the signal only in the direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 12 side to the main board 11 side. In this embodiment, a transmission direction regulating circuit is provided for each wiring for transmitting a control signal in the relay board 15, and an output buffer circuit is provided between the game control microcomputer 100 and the main board side connector on the main board 11. By providing this, it is possible to prevent an illegal signal from being input to the main board 11 from the outside.

  The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used for controlling sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And a lamp control command used for controlling the lighting operation of the decoration LED and the like. FIG. 5A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. Note that the command form shown in FIG. 5A is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 5A, a command 8001H is a first change start command for designating start of change in a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating the start of variation in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  In this embodiment, the first and second variation start commands and the variation pattern designation command are prepared as separate production control commands. On the other hand, the designation content indicating which of the first special figure and the second special figure is to be changed and the designated content of the fluctuation pattern are configured to be specified by one effect control command. Also good. As an example, an effect control command in which EXT data is set corresponding to a combination of a special symbol (first special figure or second special figure) that starts change and a change pattern is prepared. You may enable it to specify the special symbol and fluctuation pattern which become a fluctuation start. Here, when the special symbol and the variation pattern that start the variation can be specified by one effect control command, the special symbol (the first special feature that starts the variation) for one variation pattern. There are cases where it is necessary to prepare two types of effect control commands according to the figure or the second special figure. On the other hand, if an effect control command for designating a special symbol for starting variation and an effect control command for designating a variation pattern are prepared separately, two types of effect control commands corresponding to the special symbol for starting variation are prepared. And the number of effect control commands corresponding to the number of types of variation patterns may be prepared, and the types of commands prepared in advance, the storage capacity of the command table, and the like can be reduced.

  Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 5 (B), the variable display result is determined in advance as to whether the variable display result is “lost”, “big hit”, or “small hit”. Different EXT data is set according to the big hit type determination result of whether the variable display mode (big hit type) of the decorative symbol in the case of “big hit” is “non-probable change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change” Is done. More specifically, the command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result indicating that the variable display result is “lost”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result and a big hit type determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “non-probable change”. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result and a big hit type determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable change”. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result and a big hit type determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined determination result indicating that the variable display result is “small hit”.

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern designation command and the variable display result designation command are prepared as separate presentation control commands. On the other hand, the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command and the variable display result indicated by the variable display result designation command may be configured to be specified by one effect control command. As an example, an effect in which EXT data is set corresponding to a combination of a variation pattern and a variable display result (any one of “losing”, “big hit”, “small hit”, and a big hit type in the case of “big hit”). A control command may be prepared, and information that can specify the variation pattern and the variable display result may be transmitted by the effect control command. Alternatively, the variation pattern and the variable display result may be specified by three or more effect control commands. Here, when the variation pattern and the variable display result are configured to be specified by a single effect control command, a plurality of types of effects corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display results for one variation pattern. You may need to provide control commands. On the other hand, if the production control command for designating the variation pattern and the production control command for notifying the variable display result are prepared separately, the number of production control commands corresponding to the number of types of the variation pattern and the variable display result are provided. The number of effect control commands corresponding to the number of types may be prepared, and the types of commands prepared in advance, the storage capacity of the command table, and the like can be reduced.

  The command 8F00H is a decorative symbol stop command for designating stop of variable display of decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. As will be described later, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a power failure recovery designation command when data is stored in the backup RAM when power supply to the gaming machine is started, and otherwise. Sends an initialization specification command.

  The command 94XX (H) is an effect control command (winning determination result designation command) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. In this embodiment, in the winning effect determination process (see FIG. 28), which will be described later, the game control microcomputer 100 determines which variation pattern type is to be used when starting winning. Then, a value for specifying the variation pattern type as the determination result is set in the EXT data of the determination result specifying result command at the time of winning, and control for transmission to the effect control board 12 is performed. For example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5 (c), when it is determined that the variation pattern type is CA1-1 to CA1-6 (non-reach loss) at the time of starting winning the first starting winning opening. , A winning determination result 1 designation command in which “00 (H)” is set in the EXT data is transmitted. Further, when it is determined that the variation pattern type is CA2-1 to CA2-3 (normal reach lose) at the time of starting winning at the first starting winning opening, “01 (H)” is set in the EXT data. The winning determination result 2 designation command is transmitted. In addition, when it is determined that the variation pattern type is CA2-4 at the start winning to the first start winning opening (becomes super reach loss), the determination result at the time of winning when “02 (H)” is set in the EXT data 3 A designated command is transmitted. In addition, when it is determined that the variation pattern types are CA3-1 to CA3-2 (normal reach jackpot) at the time of starting winning at the first starting winning opening, “03 (H)” is set in the EXT data. A winning determination result 4 designation command is transmitted. Also, when it is determined that the variation pattern type is CA3-3 at the start winning prize to the first start winning opening (super reach big hit), the determination at the time of winning when “04 (H)” is set in the EXT data Result 5 A designation command is transmitted. Similarly, when it is determined that the variation pattern type is CA1-1 to CA1-6 (non-reach loss) at the time of starting winning at the second starting winning opening, “05 (H)” is set in the EXT data. The winning determination result 6 designation command is transmitted. Also, when it is determined that the variation pattern type is CA2-1 to CA2-3 (becomes a normal reach lose) at the time of starting winning at the second starting winning opening, “06 (H)” is set in the EXT data. The winning determination result 7 designation command is transmitted. Also, when it is determined that the variation pattern type is CA2-4 (super reach loss) at the time of the start winning to the second start winning opening, the determination result at the time of winning when “07 (H)” is set in the EXT data 8 Specify command is transmitted. In addition, when it is determined that the variation pattern type is CA3-1 to CA3-2 (normal reach jackpot) at the time of starting winning at the second starting winning opening, “08 (H)” is set in the EXT data. A winning determination result 9 designation command is transmitted. Further, when it is determined that the variation pattern type is CA3-3 at the time of starting winning the second starting winning award (becomes a super reach big hit), the determination at the time of winning when “09 (H)” is set in the EXT data Result 10 A designated command is transmitted. In addition, the value of the EXT data is set according to the determined variation pattern type (for example, accuracy, small hit), and a winning determination result designation command is transmitted.

  The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, for example, different EXT data is set corresponding to whether the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the time-short state. As a specific example, the command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to the case where the gaming state is a normal state, and the command 9501H is a highly accurate and high-speed control in which the gaming state is a probabilistic state and time-shortening control or high opening control is performed. The second gaming state designation command corresponding to the state, and the command 9502H is the third gaming state designation command corresponding to the high probability low base state (latency probability changing) in which the gaming state is the probability changing state and the time-shortening control or the high opening control is not performed. And the command 9503H may be a fourth gaming state designation command corresponding to the case where the gaming state is the short-time state.

  In this embodiment, a decoration symbol stop command 8F00H is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as an effect control command for designating stop of variable display of the decoration symbols. On the other hand, the decorative symbol stop command may not be transmitted. In this case, on the side of the production control board 12, the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command is specified, and the first variation start command and the second variation start command are received. When the elapsed time reaches the specified special figure variation time, a setting for ending the effect executed corresponding to the special game is performed without receiving an effect control command from the main board 11. You can make it.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fanfare command”) that designates display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state. In the hit start designation command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result designation command is set, so that different EXT data is set according to the predetermined determination result or the big hit type determination result. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command, the correspondence relationship between the predetermined determination result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command.

  The command A1XXH is a special winning opening opening designation command for notifying that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big winning gaming state or the small winning gaming state. The command A2XXH is a designation command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. In the special command during opening of the big prize opening and the designation command after opening the big prize opening, for example, the number of round executions (for example, “1” to “15”) in the 15 round big hit state, or the big win in the 2 round big hit state or the variable winning operation. Different EXT data is set corresponding to the number of times the mouth is opened (for example, “1” or “2”). In the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, regardless of whether the big winning opening is in the open state or the big winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state, Alternatively, a continuous performance operation may be executed from the start time of the small hit game state or from the start time of variable display of the decorative symbols to the end time of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Or, in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, depending on whether it is a period in which the big prize opening is in an open state or a period in which the big prize opening is changed from an open state to a closed state, different performance operations May be executed.

  The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. In the hit end designation command, for example, EXT data similar to the variable display result designation command or the hit start designation command is set, so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result or the big hit type determined result. Alternatively, in the hit end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the big hit type decision result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command or the hit start designation command. . In addition, when controlled to the two round big hit state and / or small hit game state, part or all of the hit start designation command, the big prize opening opening designation command, the big prize opening opening designation command, and the winning end designation command are all Instead of being transmitted, the effect operation in the two round big hit state and / or the small hit game state may be executed by the change pattern indicated in the change pattern designation command.

  The command C0XXH is a special figure reserved memory number designation command for notifying the total reserved memory number that is the total value of the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number. The special figure hold memory number designation command is executed when, for example, either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, or the special start game is executed when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied. Corresponding to the start, etc., following transmission of either the first reserved memory number designation command or the second reserved memory number designation command, it is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The In the special figure reservation storage number designation command, for example, the total storage number (for example, “0” to “8”) of the hold data in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A and the hold data in the second special figure hold storage unit 151B shown in FIG. ), Different EXT data is set. As a result, on the side of the production control board 12, when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, or when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the special game is executed. Is received, the special figure reservation storage number designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, and the total storage of the hold data in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A and the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B is received. The number can be specified.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number designation command for notifying the first special figure reserved memory number so that the special figure reserved memory number can be specified by the first reserved memory number display accessory 5D. The first reserved memory number designation command is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board in response to, for example, the first start condition being met or the first start condition being met and the execution of the special figure game being started. 12 is transmitted. In the first reserved memory number designation command, for example, different EXT data is set corresponding to the number of stored data (for example, “0” to “4”) in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A shown in FIG. . Thereby, on the side of the production control board 12, the first transmission condition transmitted from the main board 11 when the first start condition is satisfied or when the first start condition is satisfied and the execution of the special figure game is started. By receiving the 1 reserved storage number designation command and specifying the number of stored data in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, it is possible to grasp that there has been an effective start winning.

  The command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number designation command for notifying the second special figure reserved memory number so that the special figure reserved memory number can be specified by the second reserved memory number display accessory 5U. The second reserved memory number designation command is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board in response to, for example, the second start condition being met or the second start condition being met and the execution of the special figure game being started. 12 is transmitted. In the second reserved memory number designation command, for example, different EXT data is set corresponding to the number of stored pending data (for example, “0” to “4”) in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B shown in FIG. . Thereby, on the side of the production control board 12, the second transmission condition transmitted from the main board 11 when the second start condition is satisfied or when the second start condition is satisfied and the execution of the special figure game is started. By receiving the 2 reserved memory number designation command and specifying the number of reserved data stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B, it is possible to grasp that there has been an effective start winning or the like.

  In this embodiment, when the change (increase / decrease) in the number of reserved memories occurs, the production control board 12 holds the first reserved memory number designation command and the second reserved memory number designation command by transmitting them. Although it is possible to specify that there has been an effective start prize depending on whether or not the number of memories has increased, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is not determined whether or not there is an increase in the number of reserved memories In addition to these first reserved memory number designation command and second reserved memory number designation command, it passes through the first start prize opening formed by the normal prize ball device 6A so that it can be identified that there has been a valid start prize. In order to execute a special game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A based on the fact that the game ball that has entered (entered) is detected by the first start port switch 22A and a start winning is generated. A first starting port winning designation command (for example, command B100H) for notifying that the first starting condition is satisfied, or a game ball that has passed (entered) a second starting winning port formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is second. Notification that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is established based on the fact that the start winning is detected by the start port switch 22B. A second start opening winning designation command (command B200H) may be transmitted.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a control program by executing a game control program, and updates numeric data indicating random values independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 to perform and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided. As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing a program read from the ROM 101. At this time, the CPU 103 reads out fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data in the RAM 102, temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 103 temporarily stores various fluctuation data in the RAM 102. The CPU 103 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed. The one-chip microcomputer constituting the game control microcomputer 100 may include at least the RAM 103 in addition to the CPU 103, and the ROM 101 may be external or internal. Further, the random number circuit 104 and the I / O 105 may be externally attached.

  As described above, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the game control program stored in the ROM 101 to perform the game control. In other words, the processing means that the CPU 103 executes control according to a program. The same applies to a microcomputer mounted on another board different from the main board 11.

  In the main board 11, for example, the random number circuit 104 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. FIG. 6 is an explanatory view illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, a random value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, a random value MR3 for determining a variation pattern type, Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern and the random value MR5 for determining the normal display result are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used.

  Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as game random numbers. The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data indicating all or part of these random number values MR1 to MR5. For example, the CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104 such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of MR5 may be counted. As an example, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is updated independently of the CPU 103 by the random number circuit 104, and the numerical data indicating the other random number values MR2 to MR5 is updated by the CPU 103 using the random counter. It may be updated by software using Also, by executing predetermined processing such as scramble processing and arithmetic processing using all or part of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104, numerical data indicating all or part of the random number values MR1 to MR5 is obtained. It may be updated.

  The game control microcomputer 100 may have a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 100 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 101 (an ID number assigned with a different value for each product of the game control microcomputer 100). The numerical data obtained by the setting is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 104 can be further improved.

  The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state with the variable display result of a special symbol or the like in the special figure game as “big hit”. It takes a value in the range of “1” to “65535”. The random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines the jackpot type, which is the variable display mode of the decorative symbol when the variable display result is “big hit”, as one of “non-probability change”, “probability change”, and “surprise change”. For example, a value in the range of “1” to “100”.

  The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is a random value used to determine the variation pattern type in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. For example, “1” A value in the range of “251” is taken. The random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern is a random value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. For example, “1” to “ It takes a value in the range of “997”. The random value MR5 for determining the general-purpose display result is used for determining whether the variable display result in the general-purpose game by the normal symbol display 20 is “per-normal” or “unusual for general-purpose”. For example, it takes a value in the range of “3” to “13”. That is, the random number value MR5 for determining the normal game display result is a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass (enter) through the second start winning port formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B based on the variable display result in the normal game ( This is used to determine whether or not to change from a normal open state to a state where the game ball easily passes (enters) (expanded open state).

  FIG. 7 shows a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is “losing”, the variable display mode of the decorative design is “non-reach” and “reach”, respectively. When the display result is “big hit”, when the big hit type is “non-probability change” or “probability change” or “surprise change”, or when the variable display result is “small hit” Correspondingly, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach” is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as “non-reach loss variation pattern”) and is variable. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is “losing” and the decorative symbol variable display mode is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as “reach loss variation pattern”). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “lost”. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit” is referred to as a hit variation pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 7, in this embodiment, as non-reach fluctuation patterns, fluctuation patterns PA1-1 to PA1-5, fluctuation patterns PB1-1 and fluctuation patterns PB1-2 are prepared in advance. Yes. Further, as the reach variation pattern, variation pattern PA2-1, variation pattern PA2-2, variation pattern PB2-1, variation pattern PB2-2, variation pattern PA3-1, variation pattern PA3-2, variation pattern PB3-1, variation A pattern PB3-2 is prepared in advance. The hit fluctuation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probable change” include the change pattern PA4-1, change pattern PA4-2, change pattern PB4-1, change A pattern PB4-2, a fluctuation pattern PA5-1, a fluctuation pattern PA5-2, a fluctuation pattern PB5-1, and a fluctuation pattern PB5-2 are prepared in advance. As variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, or the variable display result is “small hit”, the variation patterns PC1-1 to PC1-3 are the variation patterns. Are prepared in advance. Further, a fluctuation pattern PC1-4 and a fluctuation pattern PC1-5 are prepared in advance as hit fluctuation patterns corresponding only to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”.

  FIG. 8 shows the variation pattern type in this embodiment. Each variation pattern shown in FIG. 7 is included in at least one variation pattern type among the plurality of variation pattern types shown in FIG. That is, each variation pattern type may be configured to include one or a plurality of variation patterns classified (grouped) based on, for example, an effect operation performed during variable display of decorative symbols. As an example, a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern in which a variable display state of a decorative design does not become a reach state by classifying (grouping) a plurality of variation patterns according to the type of reach effect (effect mode), and a variation with normal reach What is necessary is just to divide into the fluctuation pattern classification in which the pattern is included, and the fluctuation pattern classification in which the fluctuation pattern with a super reach (super reach α or super reach β) is included. As another example, categorizing (grouping) multiple variation patterns according to the presence or absence of “pseudo-continuous” variable display effects and the number of executions of pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) to execute “pseudo-continuous” variable display effects A variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern that is not included, a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern in which the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is 1 in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, and “pseudo-continuous” What is necessary is just to divide into the variation pattern classification in which the variation pattern which makes the frequency | count of execution of a pseudo | simulation continuous variation (revariation) 2 or more is included in the variable display effect of this. As yet another example, a plurality of variation patterns may be classified (grouped) according to the presence or absence of variable display effects such as “pseudo-continuous” and “slip”, or the variable display time of decorative symbols. Among the plurality of variation pattern types, there may be one configured to include a common variation pattern.

  In the example shown in FIG. 8, the variation pattern type CA1-1 to variation pattern type CA1-6 are prepared in advance corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”. Yes. Corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “lost” and the variable display mode is “reach”, the variation pattern types CA2-1 to CA2-3 are prepared in advance. Corresponding to the variable display result (big hit type) of “big hit” when the variable display result is “big hit”, the variable pattern type CA 3-1 to the variable pattern type CA 3-3 are prepared in advance. Corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the variable display mode (big hit type) of “surprise” or the variable display result is “small hit”, the variation pattern type CA4-1 is prepared in advance. ing. Furthermore, the variation pattern type CA4-2 is prepared in advance only in the case where the variable display result is the “big hit” and “variable display type” (big hit type).

  In the variation pattern type CA1-1, when the game state is in the low base such as the normal state, the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is not shortened, and the variable pattern such as “pseudo-ream” or “slip” is variable. The variation pattern type is “no shortening (normal state)” in which the display effect is not executed, and includes a variation pattern PA1-1 associated in advance. Fluctuation pattern type CA1-2 corresponds to the fact that the number of special figure reserved memory as the total reserved memory number is 2 to 4 when the gaming state is in the low base such as the normal state, It is a variation pattern type of “hold 2 to 4 shortened (normal state)” in which variable display time such as “pseudo ream” and “slip” is not executed because the variable display time of the decorative symbol is shortened and associated in advance Variation pattern PA1-2. The variable pattern types CA1-3 have a variable display time for special symbols and decorative symbols corresponding to the total number of reserved memories being 5 to 8 when the gaming state is in a low base such as a normal state. It is a variation pattern type of “Reservation 5-8 shortened (normal state)” in which variable display effects such as “pseudo ream” and “slip” are not executed, and a variation pattern PA1-3 associated in advance is displayed. Contains.

  In the variation pattern types CA1-4, when the gaming state is in a high base such as a short-time state, the variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols is not shortened, and variable such as “pseudo-ream” and “sliding” The variation pattern type is “no shortening (during high base)” in which the display effect is not executed, and includes a variation pattern PB1-1 associated in advance. The variable pattern type CA1-5 has a variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols corresponding to the total number of reserved memories being 2 to 8 when the gaming state is in a high base such as a short time state. It is a variation pattern type “shortened 2 to 8 (high base)” that is shortened and the variable display effect of “pseudo-ream” or “slip” is not executed, and the variation pattern PB1-2 associated in advance is Contains. The variation pattern type CA1-6 is a variation pattern type of “sliding, pseudo-continuous” in which a variable display effect of “pseudo-run” or “slip” is executed when the variable display mode is “non-reach”. The associated variation patterns PA1-4 and variation patterns PA1-5 are included.

  The variation pattern type CA2-1 is when the reach effect is ended with the normal reach that becomes the normal reach effect after the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state without executing the variable display effect of the “pseudo-ream”. Is a variation pattern type of “no normal reach (losing) pseudo-relation” for deriving and displaying a definite decorative symbol of a reach combination, and includes a variation pattern PA2-1 and a variation pattern PA2-2 that are associated in advance. In the variation pattern type CA2-2, when the “pseudo-ream” variable display effect is executed and the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state, the normal reach is involved, and when the reach effect ends, the fixed decorative symbol of the reach combination is displayed. Is a variation pattern type of “normal reach (lost) pseudo-relation” and includes a variation pattern PB2-1 and a variation pattern PB2-2 that are associated in advance. The variation pattern type CA2-3 is a super-reach (super-reach α or super-reach β) after the decorative display variable display state is set to the reach state regardless of whether or not the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed. Is a variation pattern type of “super reach (losing)” for deriving and displaying a definite decorative symbol of a reach combination when the reach production ends, and a variation pattern PA3-1 and variation pattern PA3-2 associated in advance , Fluctuation pattern PB3-1 and fluctuation pattern PB3-2.

  In the variation pattern type CA3-1, the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is not executed, but the normal display is performed after the variable symbol display state of the decorative pattern is set to the reach state, and when the reach effect ends, the definite decoration of the jackpot combination is determined. It is a variation pattern type of “no normal reach (big hit) pseudo-relation” for deriving and displaying symbols, and includes a variation pattern PA4-1 and a variation pattern PA4-2 that are associated in advance. In the variation pattern type CA3-2, the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state, and then the normal reach is involved. Is a variation pattern type of “normal reach (big hit) pseudo-relation” and includes a variation pattern PB4-1 and a variation pattern PB4-2 that are associated in advance. The variation pattern type CA3-3 is used when the reach effect ends with the super reach after the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state regardless of whether or not the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed. Is a variation pattern type of “super reach” for deriving and displaying a definite decorative combination of jackpot combination, and previously associated variation pattern PA5-1, variation pattern PA5-2, variation pattern PB5-1, variation pattern PB5-2 is included.

  The variation pattern type CA4-1 is a variation pattern type of “2nd release chance stop” that derives and displays a definite decorative symbol that is one of the 2nd release chances TC1 to TC4, and “2nd release chance stop”. Are included in advance. In the example of the variation pattern shown in FIG. 7, the variation patterns PC1-1 to PC1-3 are variation patterns in which the confirmed decorative symbol is one of the two chances of opening TC1 to TC4, and the variation pattern type CA4. −1. The variation pattern type CA4-2 is a method of deriving and displaying a definite decorative pattern of reach combination after setting the variable display state of the decorative symbol to the reach state when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. It is a variation pattern type of “open reach reach loss”, and includes a variation pattern that is associated in advance with “2 times open reach loss”. In the example of the variation pattern shown in FIG. 7, the variation pattern PC1-4 and the variation pattern PC1-5 are variation patterns having a fixed decorative design as a reach combination, and are included in the variation pattern type CA4-2. .

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 3 stores various selection data and table data used for controlling the progress of the game. . For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of types of table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 11, and a variation pattern as shown in FIG. Table data constituting a variation pattern table to be stored is stored.

  FIG. 9 shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 130 stored in the ROM 101. The special figure display result determination table 130 is displayed when the first start condition for allowing the start of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied, or in the second special symbol display device 4B. When the second start condition that allows the start of the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied, before the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result (special figure display result) of the special symbol is derived and displayed, Random value for determining the special figure display result whether to control the big display game with the variable display result as “big hit” or whether to control the small display game with the variable display result as “small hit” It is a table referred to in order to make a decision based on MR1.

  In the special figure display result determination table 130, a numerical value (to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a short-time state, or a probabilistic state. (Determined value) is assigned to one of the special chart display results of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “losing”. In this embodiment, whether the game is a special game using the first special graphic in the first special symbol display device 4A or a special game using the second special graphic in the second special symbol display device 4B. Regardless, the special figure display result is determined with reference to the same special figure display result determination table 130.

  On the other hand, each of the case of the special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the case of the special game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. Correspondingly, determination tables with different allocations of determination values for special figure display results may be prepared. In this case, in the case of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A and the case of the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B, The assignment of the decision value to the special chart display result of “small hit” may be different. As an example, in the case of a special game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B, as compared to the case of the special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A, A determination value may be assigned to each special figure display result so that the ratio determined to the special figure display result of “small hit” is low.

  With such a setting, in the special figure game using the second special figure, the probability that the variable display result will be “small hit” is reduced compared to the special figure game using the first special figure. When the game ball is likely to pass (enter) through the second start winning opening with high opening control in a short time or short time state, the special figure display result is "small hit" and the little hit that hardly gets the prize ball It is possible to prevent the gaming state from being controlled, and to suppress a decrease in the gaming interests due to the delay in the game in the probability variation state or the short time state. In particular, when the special symbol game in the second special symbol display device 4B is executed in preference to the special symbol game in the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B in the probability change state or the short time state. Since the frequency of the special game in the game will be increased, the time from the probability change state or short-time state (particularly the probability change state) to the 15th round big hit state will be shortened by such setting, and the game entertainment will be reduced. The effect that can be suppressed is great. Further, in the case of the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B, a determined value is assigned so that the special figure display result of “small hit” is not determined. May be.

  FIG. 10 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table 131 stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table 131 sets the variable display mode to “hits” based on the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined (predetermined) that the special figure display result is “big hit” and controlled to the big hit gaming state. This table is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types of jackpot types such as “non-probability change”, “probability change”, and “surprise change”. In the jackpot type determination table 131, whether the value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer (fluctuation special figure designation buffer value) provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 shown in FIG. 14 is “1” or “2”. Accordingly, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type is assigned to the big hit type such as “non-probability change”, “probability change”, and “surprise change”. Here, the variable special symbol designation buffer value becomes “1” when the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is executed, and the second special symbol display device 4B has the second value. It becomes “2” when the special figure game using the special figure is executed.

  In the jackpot type determination table 131, the table data indicating the determination values assigned to a plurality of types of jackpot types is the result of determining whether to control to the 15 round jackpot state or the 2 round jackpot state, and the end of the jackpot gaming state Later, it becomes data for determination corresponding to the determination result of whether or not to control to the probability variation state. For example, the table data indicating the decision value assigned to the “non-probable change” or “probability change” jackpot type corresponds to the decision result of controlling to the 15th round jackpot state, while being assigned to the “surprise” jackpot type. The table data indicating the determined value corresponds to the determination result of controlling to the big round hit state. The table data indicating the decision value assigned to the “non-probable” jackpot type corresponds to the decision result that the control is not controlled to the probability change state, while being assigned to the jackpot type of “probability” or “surprise”. The table data indicating the determined value indicates the determination result that the control is performed in the probability variation state. The jackpot type determination table 131 is a value corresponding to the determined jackpot type (for example, any one of “0” to “2”) as a value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer 155 (a jackpot type buffer value). Table data (setting data) may be included.

  In the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 10, the allocation of the determined value to each jackpot type differs depending on whether the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1” or “2”. For example, for the jackpot type of “probability change”, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, a determined value in the range of “37” to “72” is assigned, while the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value When “2” is “2”, a determined value in the range of “37” to “100” is assigned. When the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, a decision value in the range of “73” to “100” is assigned to the “surprise” jackpot type, while the variation special figure designation buffer value is “ In the case of “2”, the decision value is not assigned.

  In the setting example shown in FIG. 10, the special figure display result is “big hit” based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied. When it is determined to control to the big hit gaming state, it is not determined to control to the two round big hit state with the big hit type as “surprise”. With this setting, when the game ball is easy to pass (enter) through the second start winning opening in the high opening control in the probability variation state or the short time state, the big hit type is “surprise” and most of the prize balls are It is possible to prevent the game from being controlled to a two-round big hit state that cannot be obtained, and to suppress a decrease in the gaming interests due to the delay in the game in the probability variation state or the short time state. In particular, when the special symbol game in the second special symbol display device 4B is executed in preference to the special symbol game in the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B in the probability change state or the short time state. Since the frequency at which the special game is executed is increased, such a setting has a great effect of suppressing the decline of the game entertainment. In addition to this setting, the special symbol game in the second special symbol display device 4B is executed in preference to the special symbol game in the first special symbol display device 4A, so that 15 rounds from the probability variation state and the short time state can be obtained. The ratio of hitting big hits can be increased to improve the gaming fun.

  Even when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, for example, a smaller decision value than that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1” is assigned to the special figure display result of “surprise”. You may be made to do. Further, when the gaming state is the short-time state, if the big hit type is “surprise” and the game shifts to the probable change state after the end of the two round big hit state, the degree of advantage for the player increases. Thus, when the gaming state is the short-time state, even if the variable special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the big hit type determination table 131 is assigned so that the determination value is assigned to the special figure display result of “surprise”. The table data may be configured.

  11 and 12 show a configuration example of the variation pattern type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. In this embodiment, as the variation pattern type determination table, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 11A, the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132B shown in FIG. 11B, and FIG. ) Loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133A shown in FIG. 12B, Loss variation pattern type determination table (high base) 133B shown in FIG. 12B, and Loss variation pattern type determination table shown in FIG. (Latency probability changing) 133C is prepared in advance.

  The jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A, when it is determined (predetermined) that the special figure display result is “big hit”, the variation pattern type is changed according to the determination result of the jackpot type. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the numerical value MR3. In the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A, a numerical value to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type depending on whether the determination result of the jackpot type is “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprising change”. (Determined value) is assigned to any one of the variation pattern type CA3-1 to variation pattern type CA3-3, variation pattern type CA4-1, and variation pattern type CA4-2. In the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A, the determined value is assigned to each variation pattern type so that the ratio determined for each variation pattern type differs depending on which of the plurality of types of jackpot types is determined. There is a part. For example, depending on whether the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probability change”, the assignment of the decision value to the variation pattern type CA3-1 to variation pattern type CA3-3 differs. Thereby, the ratio determined to the same variation pattern type can be varied according to the determination result as to which of the multiple types of jackpot types.

  Further, in the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A, there is a portion in which the determined values are assigned to different variation pattern types depending on which of the plurality of types of jackpot types is determined. For example, when the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probability change”, the decision value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA3-1 to the variation pattern type CA3-3, while the variation pattern type CA4- No decision value is assigned to 1 and the variation pattern type CA4-2. On the other hand, when the big hit type is “surprise”, the decision values are assigned to the variation pattern type CA4-1 and the variation pattern type CA4-2, while the variation pattern type CA3-1 to No decision value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA3-3. As a result, when the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is controlled to the 2 round big hit state according to “surprise”, the variation pattern type different from the case of being controlled to the 15 round big hit state is determined. can do.

  When the big hit type is determined as “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change”, depending on whether the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a probability change state, or a short-time state Thus, the assignment of the decision value to each variation pattern type may be made different. Thereby, the ratio determined to the same fluctuation | variation pattern classification can be varied according to which of a plurality of types of gaming states. Also, when the big hit type is determined as “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change”, depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a probability change state, or a short-time state Thus, the determined values may be assigned to different variation pattern types. Thereby, it is possible to determine different variation pattern types depending on which of the plurality of types of gaming states.

  Depending on whether the big hit type is determined to be “non-probable change” or “probability change”, the determination value may be assigned to each variation pattern type. Thereby, the degree of expectation that the variable display result is “15R probability variation big hit” can be varied depending on which variable pattern type includes variable pattern execution. For example, when the jackpot type is “probable change”, a large number of decision values are assigned, while when the jackpot type is “non-probable change”, variable display is performed using a variation pattern included in the variation pattern type to which a small decision value is assigned. In such a case, the degree of expectation that the variable display result is “15R probability variation big hit” is increased.

  The small hit variation pattern type determination table 132B is a table that is referred to in order to determine the variation pattern type when it is determined (predetermined) that the special figure display result is “small hit”. In the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132B, all numerical values (determination values) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type are assigned to the variation pattern type CA4-1. Here, a part of the determined value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA4-1 in accordance with the case where the jackpot type is “surprise” in the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. . As described above, the variation pattern type CA4-1 is a common variation pattern type in the case where the big hit type is “surprise” and in the case where the special figure display result is “small hit”. That is, the table data corresponding to the big hit type “surprise” in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A and the table data constituting the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132B include a common variation pattern type. Is set to The small hit variation pattern type determination table 132B may be set so that a determination value is assigned to a variation pattern type different from the variation pattern type that can be determined when the big hit type is “surprise”. Good. In other words, the table data corresponding to the big hit type “surprise” in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A and the table data constituting the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132B include a common variation pattern type. , Each may be set to include a unique variation pattern type.

  The loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133A, the loss variation pattern type determination table (during high base) 133B, and the loss variation pattern type determination table (latency probability variation) 133C change the special figure display result to “lost”. Then, when it is determined (predetermined), it is a table that is referred to in order to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type. Here, the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133A is selected as a use table when the gaming state is the normal state, for example. On the other hand, the loss variation pattern type determination table (in the high base) 133B is a high-accuracy and high-base state in which, for example, the gaming state is a short-time state, or the short-time control and the high-opening control are performed in the probability-change state. When selected as a use table. The loss variation pattern type determination table (latency probability changing) 133C is selected as a use table when the time variation control or the high release control is not performed in the probability variation state (latency probability changing).

  In the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133A, the loss variation pattern type determination table (high base) 133B, and the loss variation pattern type determination table (latency probability change) 133C, the number of special figure hold memory as the total hold memory number Accordingly, the numerical values (determination values) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type are the variation pattern type CA1-1 to variation pattern type CA1-6, variation pattern type CA2-1 to variation pattern type CA2-. 3 is assigned. In the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133A, the loss variation pattern type determination table (high base) 133B, and the loss variation pattern type determination table (latency probability change) 133C, the ratios determined for each variation pattern type are mutually determined. Differently, there is a part in which a determined value is assigned to each variation pattern type. For example, when the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133A, the loss variation pattern type determination table (high base) 133B, and the loss variation pattern type determination table (latency probability variation) 133C are compared, the variation pattern types CA2-1 to CA2-1 are compared. There is a portion where assignment of the decision value to the variation pattern type CA2-3 is different. Thereby, the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type can be varied depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state, the high base, or the latent probability change.

  Further, in the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133A, the loss variation pattern type determination table (high base) 133B, and the loss variation pattern type determination table (latency probability variation) 133C, determination values are assigned to different variation pattern types. There is a part that has been. For example, in the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133A and the variation pattern type determination table (latency probability changing) 133C, determination values are not assigned to the variation pattern types CA1-4 and CA1-5. On the other hand, determination values may be assigned to the variation pattern types CA1-1 to CA1-3 according to the number of special figure reservations stored. On the other hand, in the loss variation pattern type determination table (in the high base) 133B, the determination values are not assigned to the variation pattern types CA1-1 to CA1-3, while the variation pattern type CA1- For 4 and the variation pattern type CA1-5, a determined value may be assigned according to the number of special figure reservations stored. As a result, different variation pattern types can be determined according to whether the gaming state is the normal state, the high base, or the latent probability change.

  In this embodiment, reference is made to any one of the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133A, the loss variation pattern type determination table (high base) 133B, and the loss variation pattern type determination table (latency probability changing) 133C. Accordingly, it is possible to determine any one of the variation pattern type CA1-1 to variation pattern type CA1-6 and the variation pattern type CA2-1 to variation pattern type CA2-3. Here, as shown in FIG. 8, the variation pattern types CA1-1 to CA1-6 are variation pattern types corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “lost” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”. It is. The variation pattern types CA2-1 to CA2-3 are variation pattern types corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “reach”. Therefore, based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133A, the loss variation pattern type determination table (during high base) 133B, and the loss variation pattern type determination table (latency probability changing) By determining the variation pattern type with reference to any one of 133C, it is possible to determine whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to the reach state.

  In this embodiment, the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133A, the loss variation pattern type determination table (high base) 133B, and the loss variation pattern type determination table (latency probability change) 133C are all shown in FIG. As shown, a range of different random number MR3 is assigned to each variation pattern type according to the number of special figure hold memories, and it is possible to determine a different variation pattern type according to the increase or decrease of the number of special figure hold memories. it can.

  Specifically, when the game state is a normal state that is neither a probability change state, a time-short state nor a latent probability change state, the change time is relatively short when the number of reserved memories is “0” or “1”. Random value MR3 is assigned to a non-reach variation pattern type that does not result in a reach that includes a variation pattern such as a random number, while random time MR3 is assigned to a normal reach variation pattern type that has a longer variation time than a non-reach variation pattern. While the range is large, the allocation range of the random value MR3 for the non-reach variation pattern type increases sequentially as the number of reserved storage increases from “2” to “4” and “5” to “8”. The allocation range of the random value MR3 for the fluctuation pattern type of normal reach which is long in comparison with the fluctuation pattern of non-reach is sequentially If the number of pending storage is large, the non-reach fluctuation pattern with a relatively short fluctuation (variable constant) time is selected and the special game is efficiently executed (digested). On the other hand, when the number of reserved memories is small, a variation pattern of normal reach having a relatively long variation (variable constant) time is selected so that a period during which the special game is not executed is long. , It is possible to avoid a decrease in the interest of the player.

  However, the allocation range of the random value MR3 for the variation pattern type of super reach is the same even if the number of reserved memories is different, and in this way, even if it is determined as super reach at the start winning prize. Regardless, a situation that is not determined to be super reach occurs in the special game corresponding to the start prize, or conversely, a special game that corresponds to the start prize is determined even though it is not determined to be super reach at the start prize. The situation where it is determined to be super reach in the figure game is prevented from occurring.

  In the above description, the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133A selected in the normal state has been described. As shown in FIG. 12, the same applies to the loss variation pattern type determination table (high base) 133B and the loss variation pattern type determination table (latency probability change) 133C. However, in the loss variation pattern type determination table (during high base), in the normal gaming state, the allocation content of the random value MR3 corresponding to the range of the reserved memory number “5” or more is allocated with the reserved memory number “2” or more. It is set to be able to promote the digestion of special figure game.

  Further, in the loss variation pattern type determination table (latency probability changing) 133C, as shown in FIG. 12C, the variation pattern type of reach and super reach is compared with the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133A. The assigned range of the random value MR3 is set large, and during these latent probability changes, a game that makes the player think that the latent probability is changing by generating more reach and super reach than the normal state. Sex has been granted.

  In this embodiment, the range of the number of reserved memories is, for example, three categories “0” to “1”, “2” to “4”, and “5” to “8” in the normal state. Although classified, the present invention is not limited to this, and these categories are, for example, two categories of “0” to “2”, “3” or more, and conversely, four or more categories. It is also good.

  FIG. 13 shows a configuration example of a variation pattern determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, a loss variation pattern determination table 134A shown in FIG. 13A and a hit variation pattern determination table 134B shown in FIG. 13B are prepared in advance as variation pattern determination tables.

  The loss variation pattern determination table 134A is based on the variation pattern determination random value MR4 according to the determination result of the variation pattern type, etc., when it is determined (preliminary determination) that the special figure display result is “lost”. It is a table referred to in order to determine any one of a plurality of types of variation patterns. In the loss variation pattern determination table 134A, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern according to the variation pattern type is one corresponding to the case where the special figure display result is “lost”. Or, it is assigned to a plurality of variation patterns (loss variation patterns).

  The hit variation pattern determination table 134B determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern determination disturbance is determined according to the determination result of the variation pattern type when the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit” or “small hit” (predetermined). It is a table referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on the numerical value MR4. In the winning variation pattern determination table 134B, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern according to the variation pattern type indicates that the special figure display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. Are assigned to one or a plurality of variation patterns (per variation pattern).

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, the main board 11 has a signal line for inputting a power-off signal output from the power monitoring unit 62 that monitors a supply voltage or the like provided on the power supply board 16. The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 is backed up by a backup power supply supplied from a backup power supply unit 61 provided on the power supply board 16. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 is kept for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply cannot be supplied because the capacitor of the backup power supply unit 61 is discharged). Saved. In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special figure process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

  Note that only the RAM 102 of the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 is backed up by the backup power supply unit 61, and backup power is not supplied to other sub-boards such as the effect control board 12.

  Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. 14 as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Yes. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 14 includes a first special figure hold storage unit 151A, a second special figure hold storage unit 151B, a general figure hold storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game A control timer setting unit 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155 are provided.

  The first special figure storage unit 151A is a special game in which a game ball wins a first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the first start condition is satisfied but the first start condition is not satisfied. On-hold data of (a special game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A associates the reservation number with the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first start winning opening, and sets the first start condition in the passage (entrance) of the game ball. The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment is held. The data is stored until the storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A in this way becomes hold storage information indicating that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is put on hold.

  The second special figure holding storage unit 151B receives the game ball at the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B and the second start condition is satisfied, but the second start condition is not satisfied. The hold data of the game (the special game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit 151B associates with the holding number in the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting winning opening, and sets the second starting condition in the passage (entrance) of the game ball. The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment is held The data is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 151B in this way becomes hold storage information indicating that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is held.

  The universal figure storage unit 151 </ b> C stores the general game holding information that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the universal figure storage unit 151C determines the common figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls in association with the reservation numbers in the order in which the game balls have passed the passing gate 41. For example, numerical data indicating the random number MR5 is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”).

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags. In this embodiment, the game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a special figure process flag, a common figure process flag, a big hit flag, a small hit flag, a probability change flag, a short time flag, and the like.

  The special figure process flag indicates the progress of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A, the progress of the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B, and the like. In step S15 of FIG. 29 executed for control and the special symbol process shown in FIG. 30, which process is to be selected and executed is instructed. The normal symbol process flag is used to select / execute processing in step S16 of FIG. 29 or the normal symbol process shown in FIG. 37 in order to control the progress of the normal symbol game using the normal symbol by the normal symbol indicator 20. Tell what to do.

  The big hit flag is set to the on state in response to a determination (predetermined) that the special figure display result is “big hit” when the special figure game is started. On the other hand, the big hit flag is cleared and turned off in response to the big hit symbol being stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game. The small hit flag is set to an on state in response to a determination (predetermined) that the special figure display result is “small hit” when the special figure game is started. On the other hand, the small hit flag is cleared and turned off in response to the small hit symbol being stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game.

  The probability change flag is set to the on state in response to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being controlled to the probability change state, and is cleared to the off state in response to the end of the probability change state. . The time reduction flag is set to the on state in response to the start of the time reduction control when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a certain change state or the time reduction state, while the time reduction control is ended. It is cleared and turned off in response to.

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers. In this embodiment, the game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with a game control process timer, a special figure variation timer, a common figure variation timer, and the like.

  The game control process timer is for measuring, for example, a time for controlling the progress of the big hit gaming state on the main board 11 side. As a specific example, the game control process timer stores, as a game control process timer value, data indicating a timer value corresponding to a time measured to control the progress of the big hit gaming state, and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the game control process timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to an elapsed time from a predetermined time, such as a start time of a big hit gaming state, and counts up periodically.

  The special figure variation timer is for measuring, on the main board 11 side, a time for controlling the progress of the special figure game such as a variable symbol display time (special figure variation time) in the special figure game. . As a specific example, the special figure variation timer stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured in order to control the progress of the special figure game as a special figure fluctuation timer value and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the special figure variation timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to an elapsed time from the start time of the special figure game and periodically counts up.

  The universal variation timer is for measuring, on the main board 11 side, a time for controlling the progress of the universal diagram game such as a variable symbol display time (ordinary variation time) of the normal symbol in the ordinary game. . As a specific example, the normal fluctuation timer stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured to control the progress of the normal figure game as a normal fluctuation timer value and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the normal time variation timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the elapsed time from the start time of the normal time game and periodically counts up.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters. In this embodiment, the game control counter setting unit 154 includes a random counter, a first start winning determination counter, a second start winning determination counter, a first reserved memory number counter, a second reserved memory number counter, and a total reserved memory number counter. , A short time counter, a round counter and the like are provided.

  The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154 is a numerical value extracted from the random number circuit 104 or a part of numerical data indicating a random number value used for controlling the progress of the game, separately from the random number circuit 104. This is for the CPU 103 to count the data so that it can be updated by software. For example, in the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2 to MR5 is stored as a random count value, and each random number is randomly or irregularly set according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. The numerical data indicating the numerical value is updated. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

  The first start winning determination counter counts the number of times that it has been determined that the signal state in the first start winning signal that is the detection signal of the game ball transmitted from the first start port switch 22A is ON. belongs to. For example, each time it is determined that the signal state in the first start winning signal from the first start port switch 22A is ON, the stored value in the first start winning determination counter is incremented by one. When the stored value in the first start winning determination counter reaches a predetermined winning determination value, the game ball that has normally entered the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is detected. Judgment is made. In addition, the stored value in the first start winning determination counter is cleared when it is determined that the signal state in the first start winning signal is OFF or when it is determined that the winning determination value has been reached. It may be initialized to “0”.

  The second start winning determination counter counts the number of times that it has been determined that the signal state in the second start winning signal that is the detection signal of the game ball transmitted from the second start port switch 22B is ON. belongs to. For example, each time it is determined that the signal state in the second start winning signal from the second start port switch 22B is ON, the stored value in the second start winning determination counter is incremented by one. When the stored value in the second start winning determination counter reaches a predetermined winning determination value, the game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is normally detected. Is made. In addition, the stored value in the second start winning determination counter is cleared when the signal state in the second start winning signal is determined to be off, or when it is determined that the winning determination value has been reached. It may be initialized to “0”.

  The first reserved memory number counter is for counting the first reserved memory number that is the number of reserved data in the first special figure reserved memory unit 151A. For example, in the first reserved memory number counter, count value data corresponding to the first reserved memory number is stored as the first reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1) Addition or 1 subtraction). The second reserved memory number counter is for counting the second reserved memory number that is the number of reserved data in the second special figure reserved memory unit 151B. For example, in the second reserved memory number counter, count value data corresponding to the second reserved memory number is stored as the second reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1) Addition or 1 subtraction). The total reserved memory number counter is for counting the total reserved memory number obtained by adding up the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. For example, count value data corresponding to the total reserved memory number is stored in the total reserved memory number counter as a total reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1 addition or 1 subtraction) in accordance with the increase or decrease in the total reserved memory number )

  The time reduction counter counts the number of remaining special-purpose games that can be executed before the completion of the time reduction control in the high base when the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probable change state or a time reduction state. belongs to. For example, when the jackpot gaming state is ended, data indicating the count initial value “100” corresponding to the jackpot type buffer value being “0” is set as the hourly count count value in the hourly number counter. . Thereafter, until the variable display result becomes “big hit”, the time count count value is decremented by 1 every time the special figure game ends. Then, when the time reduction count value reaches “0”, the time reduction control is terminated and the control to shift from the high base to the low base is performed by clearing the time reduction flag and turning it off. .

  The round number counter is for counting the number of round games executed in the big hit gaming state. For example, in the round number counter, data indicating a count initial value “1” at the start of the big hit gaming state is set as the round number count value. When one round game is finished and the next round game is started, the round count value is incremented by 1 and updated.

  The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers. In this embodiment, the game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with a transmission command buffer, a start port buffer, a variation special figure designation buffer, a jackpot type buffer, and the like.

  The transmission command buffer is used to temporarily store setting data for transmitting a control command from the main board 11 to the sub-side control board. For example, the transmission command buffer includes a plurality of buffer areas (for example, “12”), and setting data indicating storage addresses in the ROM 101 of the command table corresponding to the control command to be transmitted is stored in each buffer area. The In addition, a buffer area in which setting data is written and read in the transmission command buffer may be specified by a transmission command pointer or the like, and may be configured so that a plurality of buffer areas can be used as a ring buffer.

  The starting port buffer stores a buffer value indicating whether a game ball that has entered the first starting winning port or the second starting winning port is detected. As an example, “1” is set in the start port buffer value in response to the normal detection of a game ball that has entered the first start winning port by the first start port switch 22A. Further, “2” is set to the start port buffer value in response to the normal detection of the game ball that has entered the second start winning port by the second start port switch 22B.

  The variable special symbol designation buffer includes a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. A buffer value indicating whether the special figure game is executed is stored. As an example, “1” is set in the variable special figure designation buffer value in response to the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. Further, in response to the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B, “2” is set to the variable special figure designation buffer value. Then, in response to the end of the special figure game, the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “0”.

  The big hit type buffer stores a buffer value corresponding to a determination result in which the big hit type is one of a plurality of types when the variable display result is “big hit”. For example, based on the setting in the jackpot type determination table 131 as shown in FIG. If there is, the jackpot type buffer value is set to “1”, and if the jackpot type is “surprise”, the jackpot type buffer value is set to “2”.

  The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 3 has an input port for receiving various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100, and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area for the effect control CPU 120. Random number for updating numerical data indicating random numbers independently of the RAM 122, the display control unit 123 for executing processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, and the effect control CPU 120 A circuit 124 and an I / O 125 are mounted. As an example, in the effect control board 12, when the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect control program read from the ROM 121, a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes the various data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores them, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect data in the RAM 122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the reception control CPU 120 for receiving the input of various signals from the outside of the presentation control board 12 via the I / O 125, and the presentation control CPU 120 for I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12. Alternatively, while the production control CPU 120 is built in the production control microcomputer, at least one of the ROM 121 and the RAM 122 may be externally attached to the production control microcomputer. The random number circuit 124 may be any one that is built in or externally attached to the production control microcomputer. In the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 5, wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 13, Wiring for transmitting an electrical decoration signal as an information signal indicating lamp data is connected to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, on the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action for the trigger button 31A has been detected from the trigger sensor 35A, and the player for the push button 31B. As an information signal indicating that an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action has been detected is detected as a player's operation action for the wiring for transmitting from the push sensor 35B, the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30. Wiring for transmitting the operation detection signal is also connected from the tilt direction sensor unit 32.

  In addition, the effect control board 12 has a first reserved accessory motor 83 that moves the first reserved memory number display accessory 5D and a second reserved accessory motor 84 that moves the second reserved memory number display accessory 5U. A wiring for outputting a driving signal is connected, and a driving pulse is output from a motor driving circuit (not shown) provided on the effect control board 12 based on an instruction from the effect control CPU 120 via the wiring. Thus, the operations of the first reserved accessory motor 83 and the second reserved accessory motor 84 are controlled by the effect control CPU 120.

  On the effect control board 12, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the effect operation so as to be updateable. The random number used for controlling such a production operation is also called a production random number. FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the side of the effect control board 12. As shown in FIG. 15, in this embodiment, on the side of the effect control board 12, the random value SR1 for determining the continuous effect, the random value SR2 for determining the continuous effect type, the random value SR3 for determining the continuous effect pattern, the continuous effect canceling Numerical data indicating the random number value SR4 for determination and the random value SR5 for determining the continuous production stop timing are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a production effect, random numbers other than these may be used. For example, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the final stop symbol used for determining a final decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that becomes a variable display result of the decorative symbol may be controlled to be countable.

  The effect control CPU 120 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 124 such as a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 shown in FIG. 23, for example, to update various numerical data by software. Numerical data indicating a part of the numerical values SR1 to SR5 may be counted. Alternatively, by performing predetermined processing such as scramble processing and calculation processing using all or part of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 124, numerical data indicating all or part of the rendering random number is updated. You may make it do. When the random number circuit 124 is not mounted on the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 may count numerical data indicating all the effect random numbers using a random counter.

  The random number SR1 for determining the continuous effect is a random value used for determining whether or not to perform the continuous effect. As an example, the random number SR1 for determining the continuous effect takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”. In this embodiment, on the side of the effect control board 12 according to the type (0 to 9) of the winning determination result flag (continuous effect start condition satisfied winning determination result flag) set at the time when the continuous effect start condition is established. Whether or not to execute the continuous effect is determined by the effect control CPU 120 or the like at a different rate.

  The random number SR2 for determining the continuous effect type is a random value used to determine the type of the continuous effect to be performed as one of the patterns A to C when it is determined that the continuous effect is to be performed. As an example, the continuous effect type determination random value SR2 takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”. In this embodiment, based on the type of the winning determination result flag (continuous effect start condition satisfaction winning determination flag) set at the time when the continuous effect start condition is established, the variable display by holding storage that is the target of the continuous effect. The patterns A to C are determined at different rates by the effect control CPU 120 and the like on the effect control board 12 side depending on whether or not the game is a big hit.

  The random value SR3 for determining the continuous effect pattern is a random value used for determining the pattern (X1 to X4) of the time for starting the continuous effect when the type of the continuous effect to be executed is determined. As an example, the random value SR3 for determining the continuous performance pattern takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”. In this embodiment, based on the type of the winning determination result flag (continuous effect start condition satisfaction winning determination flag) set at the time when the continuous effect start condition is established, the variable display by holding storage that is the target of the continuous effect. The ratio at which the start of the continuous production differs depending on the production control board 120 on the side of the production control board 12 depending on whether it is non-reach loss, a reach loss or super reach loss, or a big hit Determined by

  The random value SR4 for determining the continuous effect cancellation is a random value used for determining whether or not to cancel the continuous effect in the middle of the effect when executing the continuous effect, and is “1” to “100”. Takes a value in the range.

  The random value SR5 for determining the stop timing of the continuous performance is a random value used for determining the timing to stop when stopping the continuous performance, and when the continuous performance is not canceled, This is a random value used to determine whether or not to move the first reserved memory number display combination 5D or the second reserved storage number display combination 5U at the start of variable display by storage. It takes a value in the range of “100”.

  Note that the range of values that each random value takes is shown as an example, and can be set to an arbitrary range.

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 3 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, and control pattern tables prepared for the production control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and controls.

  FIG. 16 shows a configuration example of a continuous effect determination table stored in the ROM 121. In this embodiment, the continuous production determination table implements the continuous production when the number of reserved memories of the first special drawing and the second special drawing each becomes 4 which is a condition for performing the continuous production. It is a table referred to in order to determine whether to perform based on random number SR1 for continuous production determination.

  In the continuous production determination table of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 16, different determination value numbers A to E are assigned according to the types (0 to 9) of the continuous production start condition establishment winning determination flag. Specifically, whether the continuous production start condition establishment winning determination result flag is a winning determination result 1 flag (corresponding to type 0) or a winning determination result 6 flag (corresponding to type 5) corresponding to non-reach loss, or normal reach lose A winning determination result 2 flag (corresponding to type 1) or a winning determination result 7 flag (corresponding to type 6), a winning determination result 3 flag (corresponding to type 2) or a winning determination result corresponding to super reach lose 8 flags (corresponding to type 7), winning determination result 4 flag corresponding to normal reach (corresponding to type 3) or winning determination result 9 flag (corresponding to type 8), or corresponding to per super reach Depending on whether the winning determination result is 5 flag (corresponding to type 4) or the winning determination result is 10 flag (corresponding to type 9), the random number for determining the continuous effect Numbers is compared with R1 (decision value) is at the determination value number A~E shown in FIG. 16, "continuous demonstration", or are assigned to each determination result of "non-contiguous demonstration". The continuous production start condition establishment winning determination flag is a winning determination result flag that is set when the continuous production start condition is established, as described above.

  In the continuous effect determination table, the number of determination values assigned to the determination result of “continuous effect” is a winning determination result 1 flag (corresponding to type 0) or a winning determination result 6 flag (type 5) corresponding to non-reach loss. For A), and for a winning determination result 2 flag (corresponding to type 1) or a winning determination result 7 flag (corresponding to type 6) corresponding to normal reach loss, B is a winning determination result 3 corresponding to super reach loss. For a flag (corresponding to type 2) or a winning determination result 8 flag (corresponding to type 7), C is a winning determination result 4 flag (corresponding to type 3) or a winning determination result 9 flag (corresponding to type 8) per normal reach. D) is a winning determination result 5 flag (corresponding to type 4) corresponding to each super reach or a winning determination result 1 The flag (corresponding to the type 9) E is assigned respectively.

  As these values A to E, B having a value larger than A is set, and C having a value larger than B is set. As a result, non-reach loss in the variable display of the hold memory that is the target of continuous performance is set. If there is a reach loss, a continuous production will appear at a higher rate, and if a reach loss occurs, a continuous production will appear at a higher rate. .

  In addition, D corresponding to the normal reach is set to a value larger than B corresponding to the normal reach loss, and thus, when the normal reach occurs in the variable display of the reserved storage that is the target of continuous production, The continuous production will appear at a higher rate than when the loss occurs.

  In addition, E corresponding to each super reach is set to a value larger than C corresponding to super reach loss, so that when super reach occurs in the variable display of the hold storage that is the target of continuous production. In the case of the big hit, the continuous production appears at a higher rate than in the case of the loss.

  In other words, when normal reach or super reach occurs in the variable display of the stored storage in which the continuous effect is implemented, there is a higher possibility of a big hit than when normal reach or super reach occurs without performing the continuous effect. Therefore, by implementing these continuous effects, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a big hit will be made in the reserved memory, and to improve the interest of the gaming machine.

  It should be noted that the number D of determination values assigned to the determination result of continuous rendering for the winning determination result 4 flag (corresponding to type 3) or the winning determination result 9 flag (corresponding to type 8) per normal reach is continuous. A value larger than the number of determination values (100-D) assigned to the determination result of not producing is set, that is, a value in the range of 51 to 100. By doing this, FIG. As shown in -1), when normal reach per occurrence occurs, the ratio D% determined to be continuously produced is larger than the ratio (100-D)% determined to be not continuously produced. Therefore, in the case where a normal reach hit occurs, it is easy to be determined to perform a continuous performance, so that the continuous performance is performed to give a player a sense of expectation of a big hit as described above. The variable display of the target hold memory is not a super-reach with high reliability, which is a big hit, but a normal reach with low reliability, which is a big win, is generated, but the player's expectation decreases, but the reliability is low By winning a big hit with normal reach, the player can be given a sense of surprise and a joy of making a big hit with normal reach with low reliability.

  Further, the winning determination result 5 flag (corresponding to type 4) or the winning determination result 10 flag (corresponding to type 9) corresponding to each super reach, which is per super reach, is assigned to the determination result of performing continuously. The determination value number E is set to a value larger than the determination value number (100-E) assigned to the determination result of no continuous production, that is, a value in the range of 51 to 100. Thus, as shown in FIG. 16 (B-2), when super-reach hit occurs, the ratio E% determined to be continuously produced is the ratio (100-E) decided not to be continuously produced. ) Greater than%. Therefore, when super-reach hits occur, the rate at which continuous productions appear will increase. Therefore, when the continuous productions are implemented, the game will give a sense of expectation that super-reach and big hits will occur. Can be given to a person.

  In this embodiment, when the number of reserved memories for each special figure is 3 or less, the continuous effect is not executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reserved memory is not provided. A continuous effect determination table used when the number is 3 or when the number of reserved memories is 2 may be provided so that the continuous effects are performed when the number of reserved memories is 3 or 2. . Further, when the number of reserved memories is 2 or 1, continuous production may not be performed.

  Here, the types and patterns of continuous effects in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 17. The continuous effects are roughly classified into three types, pattern A, pattern B, and pattern C.

  In the pattern A, the display mode of the target reserved memory changes from white to blue in the normal display mode, and when the display mode changes to blue, the first reserved memory number display accessory 5D or the second reserved memory number display combination This is a pattern including an effect in which the object 5U is moved to an angle of 25 degrees at a low speed and returns to the vertical position.

  In the pattern B, the display mode of the target reserved memory changes from white to red in the normal display mode, and when it changes to red, the first reserved memory number display accessory 5D or the second reserved memory number display combination This is a pattern including an effect in which the object 5U is moved to an angle of 50 degrees at medium speed and returns to the vertical position.

  In the pattern C, the display mode of the target reserved memory changes from the white color of the normal display mode to the rainbow color. This is a pattern including an effect in which the display accessory 5U is moved to an angle of 75 degrees at a high speed and returns to the vertical position.

  Then, in each of the patterns A to C, when the current reserved memory is 4, the pattern X-1 (X is the pattern A) in which the time when the display mode of the reserved memory is changed is the reserved memory 4 (at the start winning prize) , B, or C), pattern X-2 to be reserved memory 3, pattern X-3 to be reserved memory 2, and pattern X-4 to be reserved memory 1 are set. That is, when the pattern A-2, the pattern B-2, and the pattern C-2 are determined, not the start winning prize, but the reserved memory subject to continuous notice becomes the display position of the reserved memory number 3 When the change of the display mode and the movement of the first reserved memory number display accessory 5D or the second reserved memory number display accessory 5U are performed, and the pattern A-3, the pattern B-3, and the pattern C-3 are determined. The change of the display mode and the movement of the first reserved memory number display accessory 5D or the second reserved memory number display accessory 5U when the reserved memory subject to continuous notice reaches the display position of the reserved memory number 2 When pattern A-4, pattern B-4, and pattern C-4 are determined, the display mode is changed when the reserved storage subject to continuous notice becomes the display position of the number of reserved memories 1. Change and first reserved memory number display combination 5D or second reserved The movement of the number of display combination product 5U is carried out.

  When the determined continuous production pattern is the pattern X-1 or X-2, as will be described later, whether or not to cancel the continuous production, and the stop timing (the number of stored memories 2). In the case of canceling or canceling with the number of held memory 1), if the continuous production is not canceled, whether the first reserved memory number display accessory 5D or the second reserved memory number display accessory 5U is moved at the start of fluctuation By selecting whether or not the pattern X-11 or X-21 is canceled with the reserved memory number 2, the pattern X-12 or X-22 is canceled with the reserved memory number 1, and the pattern X-13 is moved when the change starts. Alternatively, the sub-pattern is determined to be either X-23 or a pattern X-10 or X-20 that is neither stopped nor moved.

  That is, for each pattern type of patterns A to C, four main patterns X-1 to X-4 having different change timings of the hold display are set, and for patterns X-1 and X-2, Furthermore, the sub-pattern (X-10, X-20) with no cancellation or movement at the start of fluctuation, the sub-pattern (X-11, X-21) to be canceled with the reserved memory number 2, and the reserved memory number 1 with Four sub-patterns are set: a sub-pattern (X-12, X-22) to be moved, and a sub-pattern (X-13, X-23) that is not stopped but moves at the start of fluctuation.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17, for each of the various patterns A to C, 10 continuous effect patterns are set, and a total of 30 continuous effect patterns are set. When it is determined to produce an effect, one of the 30 consecutive effect patterns is determined and executed.

  FIG. 18 shows a configuration example of a continuous effect type determination table stored in the ROM 121. The continuous effect type determination table is referred to in order to determine which of the patterns A to C the pattern of the continuous effect is based on the random value SR2 for determining the continuous effect type when the continuous effect is executed. It is a table. In the setting example of FIG. 18, the type of the continuous production start condition establishment winning determination result flag is “0”, “1”, “2”, “5”, “6”, “7” in which the variable display result is lost. Or the determination values of the patterns A, B, and C depending on whether the variable display result is “3”, “4”, “8”, or “9”. The assignment is different. With this setting, whether or not the random value MR3 extracted at the start winning is within the range of the variation pattern common to be lost, whether the random value MR1 extracted at the start winning is the common winning variation pattern The determination ratio of each pattern can be made different depending on whether it is within the range.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 18, for pattern A, X is assigned as the number of determination values for which the variable display result is lost, and Z is the number of determination values for which the variable display result is a hit. Assigned. For pattern B, Y is assigned as the number of determination values for which the variable display result is lost, and Y is assigned as the number of determination values for which the variable display result is successful. For pattern C, Z is assigned as the number of determination values for which the variable display result is lost, and X is assigned as the number of determination values for which the variable display result is a hit. Note that X + Y + Z, which is the sum of the number of determination values, is 100, which is the random number range of the continuous effect type determination random value SR2.

  The reliability that becomes a big hit when pattern A, pattern B, and pattern C appear in these continuous performance type determination tables can be obtained as in the calculation example shown in FIG.

  For example, when the jackpot probability is sufficiently lower than the probability of no jackpot (349 / 350≈1), such as 1/350, as in this embodiment, each of these probabilities and jackpot variation pattern type determination table The ratio determined for non-reach loss, the ratio determined for normal reach loss, the ratio determined for super reach loss, the ratio determined for normal reach, the ratio determined for super reach, and the continuous performance determination shown in FIG. Continuous production start condition calculated based on the ratio of non-reach loss, normal reach loss, super reach loss, normal reach per normal reach, and the ratio of “continuous production” based on the number of judgment values assigned per super reach The type of the winning prize determination result flag is “3”, “4”, “8” The probability P1 that the continuous effect is determined and appears when the big hit is “9”, and the types of the consecutive effect start condition establishment winning determination flag are “0”, “1”, “2”, “5”, Multiplying the ratio of the number of judgment values set for each of the patterns A to C by the ratio of the probability P2 that the continuous effect is determined and appears when the big hit of “6” and “7” is not reached. Since the reliability can be obtained by using the values as approximate values, for example, X is a determination value that satisfies X> Y> Z as the number of determination values such that the reliability satisfies pattern A <pattern B <pattern C. By setting = 60, Y = 30, and Z = 10, the continuous effect type determination table is set so that the reliability of each of the patterns A to C is pattern A <pattern B <pattern C.

  Accordingly, the hold display changes to blue, and the hold display changes to red as compared with the case where the pattern A in which the first hold memory number display accessory 5D or the second hold memory number display accessory 5U moves slowly and smallly occurs. At the same time, the expectation that a big hit will occur when the pattern B in which the first reserved memory number display accessory 5D or the second reserved memory number display accessory 5U moves slightly faster and slightly larger is generated. And the hold display changes to a rainbow color, and the pattern C in which the first reserved memory number display accessory 5D or the second reserved memory number display accessory 5U moves quickly and greatly is generated. In this case, the player can have a sense of expectation that a big hit will occur, and the interest of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  In the continuous effect type determination table in FIG. 18, the number of determination values is indicated by the same symbols X, Y, and Z for convenience of explanation, but these numerical values indicate the reliability of the patterns A to C. If pattern A <pattern B <pattern C, the number of judgment values X ′, Y ′, Z ′ different from the number of judgment values X, Y, Z when lost is the number of judgment values when the big hit You may make it allocate as.

  FIG. 19 shows a configuration example of a continuous effect pattern determination table stored in the ROM 121. The continuous effect pattern determination table determines which of the patterns X-1 to X-4 is the main pattern of the continuous effect based on the random value SR3 for determining the continuous effect pattern when the continuous effect is executed. This is a table to be referred to.

  In the setting example of FIG. 19, the type of the continuous production start condition establishment winning determination result flag is “0” or “5” in which the variable display result is non-reach loss, or “1” that is normal reach loss or super reach loss. ”,“ 2 ”,“ 6 ”,“ 7 ”, or depending on whether the variable display result is“ 3 ”,“ 4 ”,“ 8 ”,“ 9 ”, the pattern X− 1, the assignment of the decision value to each of the pattern X-2, the pattern X-3, and the pattern X-4 is different, and the variable display result is non-reach loss, the normal reach loss, or the super reach loss, In this case, the determination ratios determined for the pattern X-1, the pattern X-2, the pattern X-3, and the pattern X-4 can be varied.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 19, for “0” and “5” which are non-reach loss, a1 for pattern X-1, a2 for pattern X-2, and a3 for pattern X-3. The number of determination values a4 is assigned to the pattern X-4.

  For “1”, “2”, “6”, and “7”, which are normal reach lose or super reach lose, b1 for pattern X-1, b2 for pattern X-2, and b2 for pattern X-3 The number of determination values b4 is assigned to b3 and pattern X-4.

  For winning “3”, “4”, “8”, “9”, c1 for pattern X-1, c2 for pattern X-2, c3 for pattern X-3, pattern X The number of determination values of c4 is assigned to -4.

  In this embodiment, as the respective determination value numbers a1 to a4, b1 to b4, and c1 to c4, reliability of pattern X-2> pattern X-1> reliability of pattern X-3> reliability of pattern X-4 The number of judgment values is set.

  In the present embodiment, the determination value numbers a1 to a4, b1 to b4, and c1 to c4 are set so that the reliability of the pattern X-2 is the highest, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the reliability of the pattern X-4> the reliability of the pattern X-3> the reliability of the pattern X-2> the reliability of the pattern X-1, for example, The reliability may be increased.

  Here, the reliability of each pattern X-1 to X-4 appears when each pattern X-1 to X-4 occupies the total probability that each pattern X-1 to X-4 appears is a big hit. The reliability indicates the probability that each of the patterns A to C is determined when the type of the continuous production start condition satisfaction winning determination result flag is “0” or “5” that is non-reach loss. Each pattern A to C is determined when the type of the Pα (X), continuous effect start condition establishment winning determination result flag is “1”, “2”, “6”, “7”, which is normal reach loss or super reach loss Each pattern A to C is determined when the probability of being played is Pβ (X), and the type of the continuous production start condition establishment winning determination flag is “3”, “4”, “8”, “9” If the probability of being Pγ (X) is calculated in FIG. As shown, each pattern X-1 to X-4 can be calculated from these probabilities and the number of determination values assigned to each pattern X-1 to X-4. The number of determination values a1 to c4 may be set such that the reliability of the pattern X-2 is greater than the reliability of the pattern X-2> the pattern X-1> the reliability of the pattern X-3> the pattern X-4.

  The probabilities Pα (X), Pβ (X), and Pγ (X) are similar to the above-described probabilities P1 and P2, and the jackpot probability (1/350), the probability that the jackpot will not be hit (349/350), and the jackpot fluctuation The ratio determined as non-reach loss by the pattern type determination table, the ratio determined as normal reach loss, the ratio determined as super reach loss, the ratio determined per normal reach, the ratio determined per super reach, and FIG. In the continuous performance determination table shown in FIG. 16, the non-reach loss, normal reach loss, super reach loss, normal reach per normal reach, and the determination ratio of the pattern based on the number of determination values assigned per super reach. , Normal reach lose, super reach The determination ratio of “continuous effect” based on the number of determination values assigned to each player, normal reach, and super-reach, and each determination assigned to lose or win in the continuous effect type determination table shown in FIG. What is necessary is just to calculate based on the determination ratio of the pattern based on the number of values.

  As a specific setting example of the determination value numbers a1 to c4 such that the reliability of the pattern X-2> the pattern X-1> the reliability of the pattern X-3> the pattern X-4, a continuous production start condition satisfaction winning determination is made. When the type of the result flag is “3”, “4”, “8”, “9”, the determination ratio (probability) of each pattern X-1 to X-4 is X-2 (45%)> X −1 (33%)> X−3 (11%) = X−4 (11%), and the types of the consecutive production start condition satisfaction winning determination result flags are “1”, “2”, “6”, “7” The determination ratio (probability) of each pattern X-1 to X-4 is “X-1 (53%)> X-2 (26%)> X-3 (20%)> X-4 ( 1%), and the determination ratio (probability) of each pattern X-1 to X-4 when the type of the consecutive production start condition establishment winning determination flag is “0” or “5” , X-1 (50%)> X-2 (25%)> X-3 (20%)> X-4 may be set to (5%).

  With this setting, at which timing the display color of the on-hold storage display changes, more specifically, at the time of starting winning (holding storage number 4), or the next variable after the starting winning It is possible to make the player pay attention to whether the display changes at the start of the display, and the interest of the game is improved. A plurality of continuous effect pattern determination tables to which different determination values are assigned are set in accordance with the total number of reserved memories at the time of starting the continuous effect, and each pattern X-1 to X is set in accordance with the total number of reserved memories. The reliability of -4 may be different.

  FIG. 20A shows a configuration example of a continuous effect stop determination table stored in the ROM 121. The continuous effect cancellation determination table is a table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to cancel the continuous effect based on the random number SR4 for determining the continuous effect cancellation when the continuous effect is executed. In the setting example of the continuous production stop determination table, the type of the continuous production start condition establishment winning determination result flag is “0” or “5” corresponding to non-reach loss, or “2” or “7” corresponding to super reach loss. Depending on whether it is “4” or “9” corresponding to per super reach, the assignment of the decision value to the decision result of whether or not to stop the execution of the continuous effect is different. With such a setting, whether the random value MR3 extracted at the start winning is within the range of the non-reach fluctuation pattern common range, whether it is within the super reach fluctuation pattern common range, Depending on whether or not the extracted random number value MR1 matches the determined value for which the variable display result is “big hit”, it is possible to vary the determination ratio of whether or not to stop the continuous performance.

  In the setting example of the continuous production stop determination table of the present embodiment, when the type of the continuous production start condition establishment winning determination result flag is “4” or “9” which is a big hit, the continuous production start condition establishment prize determination result flag A smaller decision value is assigned to the decision result for canceling the continuous performance than when the type is “0” or “5”, “2” or “7” (the variable display result is “lost”). Yes. With such a setting, when the random value MR1 extracted at the time of winning the start matches the determined value for which the variable display result is “big hit”, the continuous performance is performed at a lower rate than when it does not match. A decision to cancel can be made. Therefore, when the continuous production is not stopped, the expectation that the variation (variable) display result becomes “big hit” can be enhanced more than when the continuous production is stopped, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, when the type of the continuous production start condition establishment winning determination result flag is “4” or “9” that is a big hit, the decision value for suspending the continuous production is not assigned to the decision value, and the variable display If the result is a “hit”, the continuous performance may not be stopped at all. In addition, when the type of the continuous production start condition establishment winning determination result flag is “0” or “5”, “2” or “7” (variable display result is “losing”), the determination result that does not stop the continuous production The determined value is not assigned to the screen, and if the variable display result is “losing”, the continuous effect may always be stopped.

  Further, in the setting example of the continuous production stop determination table of the present embodiment, when the type of the continuous production start condition establishment prize determination result flag is “2” or “7”, the continuous production start condition establishment prize determination result flag A smaller decision value than the case where the type is “0” or “5” is assigned to the decision result for stopping the continuous performance. With such a setting, when the random value MR3 extracted at the time of starting winning is within the range of the super reach variation pattern common range, the continuous performance is at a lower rate than when it is within the range of the non reach variation pattern common range. Can be decided to cancel. Therefore, when the continuous performance is not canceled, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by raising the sense of expectation to become super reach than when the continuous performance is canceled.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the type of the continuous production start condition establishment winning determination result flag is “1” or “6” which is normal reach lose, and the type of the continuous production start condition establishment winning determination result flag is per normal reach. In the case of “3” or “8”, when the determination value is not assigned and the normal reach occurs, as described above, the probability that the continuous effect is generated in the case of the normal reach is increased. Therefore, the continuous production that appears by increasing these probabilities will not be canceled unnecessarily, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the normal reach is also super As with reach, you may want to cancel.

  FIG. 20B shows a configuration example of a continuous effect stop timing determination table stored in the ROM 121. The continuous effect stop timing determination table is a table that is referred to in order to determine the stop timing when canceling the continuous effect. In the setting example of the continuous production stop timing determination table, the type of the continuous production start condition establishment winning determination result flag is “0” or “5” corresponding to non-reach loss, or “2” or “7” corresponding to super reach loss. ”Or“ 4 ”or“ 9 ”corresponding to per super reach, the allocation of the determination value to the determination result of the timing for stopping the execution of the continuous effect differs.

  In this embodiment, as the timing for stopping the continuous performance, when the number of reserved memories becomes 2 (corresponding to patterns X-11 and X-21) or when the number of reserved memories becomes 1 (pattern X−). 12, corresponding to X-22). With such a setting, whether the random value MR3 extracted at the start winning is within the range of the non-reach fluctuation pattern common range, whether it is within the super reach fluctuation pattern common range, Depending on whether or not the extracted random value MR1 matches the determined value for which the variable display result is “big hit”, the determination ratio of the timing for stopping the continuous effect can be varied.

  In the setting example of the continuous production stop timing determination table shown in FIG. 20B, the continuous production start condition is established when the type of the continuous production start condition establishment prize determination result flag is “4” or “9”, which is a big hit. When the type of the winning determination result flag is “0” or “5”, “2” or “7” (the variable display result is “losing”), a larger number of determination values is 1 It is assigned to the decision result to stop the continuous performance. With such a setting, when the random number MR1 extracted at the time of winning a start matches the determined value for which the variable display result is “big hit”, the number of stored storages is higher at a higher rate than when it does not match. When the value is 1, it is possible to make a decision to stop the continuous performance. Therefore, when the continuous production is canceled when the number of reserved memories is 1, the expectation that the variable display result will be “big hit” is greater than when the continuous production is canceled when the number of stored memories is two. It can be raised and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the setting example of the continuous production stop timing determination table in FIG. 20B, when the type of the continuous production start condition establishment winning determination result flag is “2” or “7”, the continuous production start condition establishment winning determination is made. More determination values than those in the case where the type of the result flag is “0” or “5” are assigned to the determination result for stopping the continuous effect when the number of reserved memories is 1. With such a setting, when the random number value MR3 extracted at the time of winning a start is within the range of the super reach variation pattern common range, it is stored at a higher rate than when it is within the range of the non-reach variation pattern common range. When the number is 1, it is possible to make a decision to stop the continuous performance. Therefore, when the continuous production is canceled when the number of reserved memories is 1, the expectation to become super reach is increased more than when the continuous production is canceled when the number of stored memories is 2, Interest can be improved.

  In this embodiment, when the continuous effect pattern is X-1 or X-2 (when the hold memory display is changed when the hold memory number is 4 or 3), the decision to stop the continuous effect is made. It has become. As shown in FIG. 17, depending on the timing at which the continuous performance is stopped, pattern X-11 or X-21 (stopped with the number of reserved memories 2) and pattern X-12 or X-22 (stopped with the number of reserved memories 1) ) Is determined.

  FIG. 21 shows a configuration example of the movement start determination table at the time of change stored in the ROM 121. The movement determination table at the start of change is displayed on the basis of the random value SR5 when the variable display based on the reserved storage that is the target of continuous production is started, and the first reserved memory number display accessory 5D and the second reserved memory number display. It is a table referred in order to determine whether to move the accessory 5U. In the setting example of FIG. 21, the type of the continuous production start condition establishment winning determination result flag is “0”, “1”, “2”, “5”, “6”, “7”. , Or assigning a decision value to the decision result of whether or not to move depending on whether the variable display result is “3”, “4”, “8”, or “9” Is different. With such a setting, whether or not the random value MR3 extracted at the start winning is within the range of the fluctuation pattern common range causing the loss, the random value MR1 extracted at the starting winning is set to the variable display result “big hit”. Depending on whether or not it matches with the determined value, the determination ratio of whether or not to move when variable display by holding storage is started can be made different.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 21, F is assigned as the number of determination values on which the variable display result is hit for the determination result of movement corresponding to the patterns X-13 and X-23. At the same time, 100-F is assigned as the number of determination values for which the variable display result is lost. On the other hand, with respect to the determination result indicating no movement corresponding to the patterns X-10 and X-20, conversely, 100-F is assigned as the number of determination values on which the variable display result is hit, and the variable display result is displayed. F is assigned as the number of determination values that are lost.

  In the present embodiment, as the number of determination values F, the number of determination values satisfying the reliability M when moving> the reliability N when not moving is set.

Here, the reliability M in the case of movement is, as shown by way of example for X-13 in FIG.
This is the ratio of the probability that the pattern X-13 appears when the pattern X-13 appears to be a big hit in the total probability that the moving pattern X-13 appears. The reliability N when the pattern X-13 does not move is as shown for X-10. The ratio of the probability of appearance when the pattern X-10 is a big hit in the total probability of occurrence of the non-moving pattern X-10. X-23 may be calculated in the same manner as X-13.

  These reliability levels M and N are “0”, “1”, “2”, “5”, “6”, and “7” when the type of the consecutive production start condition establishment winning determination flag is lost. When the probability that the pattern X-1 is determined is PP (X-1), and the type of the continuous production start condition establishment winning determination flag is “3”, “4”, “8”, “9” If the probability that the pattern X-1 is determined is PQ (X-1), these probabilities PP (X-1), PQ (X-1) and “movement” are shown in FIG. It can be calculated from the number of determination values assigned to each determination result of “Yes” or “No move”, and the reliability M when moving calculated from these mathematical formulas is higher than the reliability N when not moving It is sufficient to set each determination value number F so as to increase.

  The probabilities PP (X-1) and PQ (X-1) are similar to the above-mentioned probabilities Pα (X), Pβ (X), Pγ (X), etc. Probability (349/350), ratio determined to be non-reach out of jackpot variation pattern type determination table, ratio determined to normal reach lose, ratio determined to super reach lose, ratio determined per normal reach, super reach 16 is based on the ratio determined per hit and the number of judgment values assigned per non-reach loss, normal reach lose, super reach lose, normal reach, and super reach in the continuous effect determination table shown in FIG. In the decision ratio and the consecutive production type decision table shown in FIG. The determination ratio of the pattern based on each determination value number, and the determination ratio of the pattern based on each determination value number assigned per non-reach loss, reach loss, in the continuous performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. It may be calculated based on the non-reach lose, super reach lose, and the determination ratio of not canceling based on the number of determination values assigned per super reach in the continuous effect stop determination table in FIG.

  Thus, by setting the reliability when moving at the start of change to be high, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not to move at the start of change, and the interest of the game is improved.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as described above, the movement angle of the first reserved memory number display accessory 5D and the second reserved memory number display accessory 5U when the display of the reserved memory changes in the patterns A to C. Since the patterns A to C with different movement speeds and different movement angles and movement speeds are set to have different reliability as described above, these patterns and A to C move at the start of fluctuation. Since the reliability becomes different depending on the combination of not, the player pays attention to these combinations, so that the interest of the game is improved.

  That is, in the combination of the patterns A to C and the presence / absence of movement, the reliability of the pattern A-10 when the pattern A does not move when the change is disclosed is the lowest, and the pattern C− when the pattern C moves when the change is disclosed. The reliability of 13 is the highest.

  In this embodiment, there are only two movement patterns at the start of fluctuation, that is, whether or not to move, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these movement patterns are the same as patterns A to C. By providing three or more patterns with different movement angles and movement speeds and assigning the SR5 determination value so that the reliability of each of these movement patterns is different, The reliability may be suggested by a combination with the movement pattern at the time of the change in the pending storage.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the continuous effect pattern is X-1 or X-2 (when the hold memory display is changed when the hold memory number is 4 or 3), the continuous effect is not stopped. When it is determined, whether or not to move at the time of variable disclosure is determined. As shown in FIG. 17, the pattern X-13 or X-23 is determined when moving when the variation is disclosed, and the pattern X-10 or X-20 is determined when not moving when the variation is disclosed.

  In this embodiment, the presence or absence of execution of continuous effects is determined by the continuous effect determination table shown in FIG. 16, and the types of continuous effects (patterns A to C) are determined by the continuous effect type determination table shown in FIG. Whether or not the continuous production patterns X-1 to X-4 are determined by the continuous production pattern determination table shown in FIG. 19 and the continuous production is stopped by the continuous production cancellation decision table shown in FIG. 20 is determined, the timing for stopping the continuous effect is determined by the continuous effect stop timing determination table shown in FIG. 20B, and whether or not to move at the start of the change by the change start movement determination table shown in FIG. Is determined and set as a continuous production pattern to be executed by a continuous production pattern corresponding to these decisions. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a continuous production determination table in which determination values are assigned to all the continuous production patterns A-10 to C-40 shown in FIG. It may be determined. By determining with one table, it becomes easy to adjust the ratio of stopping the continuous performance. In addition, there is a setting that does not stop the continuous production when the number of hold is below a predetermined number (for example, setting that the hold display is changed when the hold number is 2 and the white display is not returned by the stop). It becomes easy.

  The ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 includes an image display device 5, speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, a light emitter such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decoration LED, a stick controller 30, and a movable member included in the effect accessory. In order to control the production operation using the production device (production electrical component) including a plurality of types, pattern data constituting the production control pattern is stored in advance. Such an effect control pattern may include, for example, a symbol variation control pattern, a notice effect control pattern, a continuous effect control pattern, a hit effect control pattern, and the like.

  The symbol variation control pattern relates to a variable display operation of the decorative symbol in the display area of the image display device 5 in a period from when the decorative symbol variable display is started to when the final decorative symbol which is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. What is necessary is just to be comprised in advance by the pattern data etc. which show the content of control, and for every variation pattern of a decoration design. Further, different symbol variation control patterns may be prepared corresponding to a plurality of types of effect modes in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Each of the plurality of symbol variation control patterns includes a decorative symbol display position and a decorative symbol display position in a variable symbol display performed using a final symbol that is a final stop symbol, a temporary stop symbol that is temporarily stopped during variable display, and the like. It is only necessary to define a time schedule such as the size, the direction of variation of the decorative pattern, and the variation speed. Here, the final stop symbol, the temporary stop symbol, etc. are determined at the start of variable display based on the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. If it is.

  The notice effect control pattern is composed of pattern data indicating the control content of the effect operation in the notice effect, and may be prepared in advance for each of the notice effect patterns according to the contents of the effect operation in the notice effect. For example, each of the plurality of notice effect control patterns is prepared in advance to execute a plurality of notice patterns prepared in advance for executing a notice effect of “character notice” or a notice effect of “notice during operation”. Corresponding to one of the plurality of notice patterns, the display position and size of the effect image, the update display procedure, the setting of the operation valid period for effectively detecting the operation action on the operation button 32, and the switching of the effect operation at the time of detecting the operation It is only necessary to define a time schedule such as setting.

  The continuous effect control pattern may be composed of pattern data indicating the control content of the effect operation in the continuous effect, and may be prepared in advance in accordance with the content (notification content) of the effect operation in the continuous effect. For example, each of the plurality of continuous performance control patterns is a timing for changing the display color of the reserved display, the first reserved memory number display accessory 5D or the first, depending on which of the continuous effect patterns A10 to C-11. It is only necessary to define the angle, speed, timing, etc. for moving the 2 reserved memory number display accessory 5U.

  The win-time effect control pattern indicates the control contents of the effect operation in the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state after the special figure display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit” or “small hit”. The special figure display result is “big hit” or “small hit”, whether the big hit type is “non-probability change” or “probability change” or “surprise change”, May be prepared in advance according to the presence / absence of promotion effect during the big hit.

  FIG. 22A shows a configuration example of such various effect control patterns. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 22A, the effect control pattern includes various effect operations such as an effect control process timer determination value, display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, and an end code. It is composed of process data serving as control data for control, and it is only necessary to set the contents of various effects control, timing control switching timing, and the like in time series.

  The effect control process timer determination value is a value (determination value) to be compared with an effect control process timer value that is a stored value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 shown in FIG. A determination value corresponding to the execution time (production time) of the production operation is set in advance. In place of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect control command is received from the main board 11, or a predetermined process is executed as a process for controlling the effect operation in the effect control CPU 120. The data indicating the switching timing of effect control or the like may be set corresponding to predetermined control content or processing content.

  The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the effect image on the display screen of the image display device 5, for example, data indicating the variation mode of each decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, the display control data is data that designates the display operation of the effect image on the display screen of the image display device 5. The voice control data includes data indicating the voice output mode from the speakers 8L and 8R, such as data indicating the output mode of sound effects in conjunction with the variable display operation of the decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol, for example. Yes. That is, the audio control data is data that designates an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R. The lamp control data includes data indicating a lighting operation mode of the light emitter, such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decoration LED. That is, the lamp control data is data for designating the lighting operation of the light emitter. In the operation detection control data, for example, an operation operation period using the operation buttons 32, such as an operation effective period for effectively detecting an operation on the operation buttons 32, data for designating the control content of the effect operation when the operation buttons are detected effectively, and the like. Is included. Note that these control data do not have to be included in all the effect control patterns, but an effect control pattern configured to include a part of the control data according to the contents of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be. Further, in the plural types of process data included in the effect control pattern, the types of control data constituting each process data may be different according to the contents of the effect operation executed at each timing. That is, there may be process data configured to include all of the display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, and operation detection control data, or process data configured to include a part of these. Further, for example, various other control data such as movable member control data indicating an operation mode of the movable member included in the effect accessory may be included.

  FIG. 22B shows various rendering operations that are executed according to the contents of the rendering control pattern. The production control CPU 120 determines the control content of the production operation according to various control data included in the production control pattern. For example, when the effect control process timer value matches one of the effect control process timer determination values, the decorative design is displayed in a manner specified by the display control data associated with the effect control process timer determination value, and the character Control is performed to display effect images such as images and background images on the display screen of the image display device 5. In addition, control is performed to output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner specified by the sound control data, and control is performed to flash a light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp control data. Control is performed to accept the operation on the operation button 32 during the operation effective period specified by the detection control data and determine the content of the effect. Note that dummy data (data not specifying control) may be set as data corresponding to a production component that does not become a control target even though it corresponds to the production control process timer determination value.

  The effect control CPU 120 sets the effect control pattern based on the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command, for example, when variable display of decorative symbols is started. Here, when setting the effect control pattern, the pattern data constituting the corresponding effect control pattern may be read from the ROM 121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the corresponding effect control pattern is configured. The storage address of the pattern data in the ROM 121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and the reading position of the storage data in the ROM 121 may be designated. After that, every time the production control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the production control process timer judgment values. If they match, the production operation according to the corresponding various control data Control. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 performs effect devices (image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, game effect lamps) according to the contents of process data # 1 to process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern. The control of the light emitter such as 9) is advanced. In each process data # 1 to process data #n, display control data # 1 to display control data #n and voice control data # 1 to voice control associated with production control process timer determination values # 1 to #n are provided. Data #n, lamp control data # 1 to lamp control data #n, and operation detection control data # 1 to operation detection control data #n indicate the control content of the rendering operation in the rendering device and specify the execution of the rendering control. Control execution data # 1 to production control execution data #n are configured.

  A command according to the effect control pattern set in this way is output from the effect control CPU 120 to the display control unit 123, the sound control board 13, and the like. In the display control unit 123 that has received a command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, a predetermined VDP or the like is developed by reading out image data indicated by the command from an image data memory such as CGROM and temporarily storing it in the VRAM. On the voice control board 13 that has received a command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, the voice synthesis IC reads out the voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM and temporarily stores it in the voice RAM or the like. .

  The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 3 is provided with an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. 23, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. ing. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 23 includes a special figure hold storage unit 195, an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit. 194.

  In the special figure storage unit 195, the presence / absence of the right (“0”) is determined by associating with the hold number according to the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first starting winning port or the second starting winning port. No right, “1” is right), and a continuous determination determined based on a winning determination result designation command transmitted from the main board 11 in response to execution of a winning effect determination process based on a start winning prize A production pattern is stored for each of the first special figure and the second special figure. In this way, the data stored in the special figure storage unit 195 is displayed on the first reserved memory number display accessory 5D and the second reserved memory number display accessory 5U, and the display of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number and the reservation notice. It is used to specify the pattern of continuous performance to be performed. An area in which data about the first special figure is stored may be referred to as a first reserved storage unit, and an area in which data about the second special figure is stored may be referred to as a second reserved storage unit.

  In the effect control flag setting unit 191, for example, a state according to an effect operation state such as an effect image display state on the display screen of the image display device 5, a display state of a hold storage display, an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, or the like. A plurality of types of flags that can be updated are provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as an effect image display operation on the display screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the production control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the production control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters. As an example, the effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a random counter for counting part or all of numerical data indicating random values (effect random numbers) used for controlling the progress of the effect operation. Just do it.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The display control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. For example, the display control unit 123 executes various types of effect display such as variable display of decorative symbols and effect display in reach effects by determining the switching timing of effect images to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Control. The display control unit 123 may be configured to include a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), an LCD drive circuit, and the like.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 or the like, various operation detection signals transmitted from the trigger sensor 35A, the push sensor 35B, and the tilt direction sensor unit 32, and the like. An input port for capturing signals and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 are configured. For example, from the output port of the I / O 125, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 5, a command (sound effect signal) transmitted to the sound control board 13, and a command transmitted to the lamp control board 14 (Electric decoration signal), a command (driving signal) transmitted to the first holding accessory motor 83 and the second holding accessory motor 84, and the like are output.

  On the voice control board 13, for example, an input / output driver, a voice synthesis IC, a voice data ROM, an amplifier circuit, a volume, and the like are mounted. As an example, in the voice control board 13, the sound number data indicated in the sound effect signal transmitted from the effect control board 12 is input to the voice synthesis IC via the input / output driver. The voice synthesis IC generates voice and sound effects corresponding to the sound number data and outputs them to the amplifier circuit. The amplifier circuit outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume to the speakers 8L and 8R. The voice data ROM stores control data corresponding to the sound number data, and the voice synthesis IC reads out the control data corresponding to the sound number data to generate voice and sound effects. The data stored in the audio data ROM may be composed of data indicating the output mode of audio and sound effects in a predetermined period in time series.

  For example, an input / output driver and a lamp driver are mounted on the lamp control board 14. As an example, in the lamp control board 14, the electrical decoration signal transmitted from the effect control board 12 is input to the lamp driver via the input / output driver. The lamp driver amplifies the electric decoration signal and supplies it to the game effect lamp 9 and the like.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. In the main board 11, when power supply from the power supply board 16 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 performs necessary initial settings after setting the interrupt disabled. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 101 is cleared. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed before entering the loop process. When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG.

  When a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 103 executes a timer interrupt process in steps S20 to S27 shown in FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 24 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether the power-off signal is turned on) (step S20). ). The power-off signal is output, for example, when the power monitoring unit (circuit) 62 mounted on the power supply board 16 detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the power-off detection process, when the CPU 103 detects that the power-off signal is output, the CPU 103 executes a power supply stop process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, the state of detection signals input from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 by executing predetermined switch processing. Is determined (step S21). Subsequently, display control is performed for the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, and the universal figure hold indicator 25C. Display control processing is executed (step S22). For the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20, control for outputting a drive signal to each display is executed according to the contents of the output buffer. Further, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each random number for determination such as a random number for normal symbol determination used for game control is performed (step S23).

  Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as random number values MR1 to MR5 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol is processed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of the display operation in the display device 4B, setting of the opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process, a normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED, etc.) on the normal symbol display 20 by executing the normal symbol process, so that the variable display of the normal symbol and the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B are movable. Enables setting of the tilting movement of the blade. After executing the normal symbol process, the CPU 103 transmits a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process (step S27). As an example, in the command control process, in response to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155, among the output ports included in the I / O 105, effect control After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the board 12, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. By changing the state to the off state, the presentation control command can be transmitted based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enabled state, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 24 as the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

  26 and 27 are flowcharts showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S101. In the start winning determination process shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the CPU 103 first reads the input port data stored in a predetermined input port register (step S201 in FIG. 26). Here, the input port register is a register in which, for example, a bit value indicating an input state of an external signal at an input port included in the I / O 105 is stored. In this embodiment, the input port data stored in the bit number [0] of the input port register is the input state (OFF / ON) of the first start winning signal that becomes the detection signal transmitted from the first start port switch 22A. ) And the input port data stored in the bit number [1] of the input port register is the input state of the second start winning signal (OFF / ON).

  It is determined whether or not the bit value [1] of the input port register read in step S201 is “1” (step S202). At this time, if the bit value is “1” (step S202; Yes), the second start winning determination count value that is the stored value of the second start winning determination counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 is, for example, Update so as to count up by adding 1 (step S203). On the other hand, when it is determined as “0” in step S202 (step S202; No), the second start winning determination counter is cleared and the stored value is initialized to “0”. (Step S204).

  After executing one of the processes in steps S203 and S204, it is determined whether or not the bit value in the bit number [0] of the input port register read in step S201 is “1” (step S205). At this time, if the bit value is “1” (step S205; Yes), the first start winning determination count value that is the stored value of the first starting winning determination counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 is, for example, It is updated so as to count up by adding 1 (step S206). On the other hand, when it is determined as “0” in step S205 (step S205; No), the first start winning determination counter is cleared and the stored value is initialized to “0”. (Step S207).

  After executing one of the processes of steps S206 and S207, it is determined whether or not the first start winning determination count value has reached a predetermined determination value (for example, “2”) that is predetermined as a winning determination value. (Step S208). At this time, if the first start winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value (step S208; Yes), the starting port buffer value that is the stored value of the starting port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is “1” is set (step S209). Further, the first start winning determination counter is cleared and the count value is initialized to “0” (step S210).

  If the first start winning determination count value has not reached the winning determination value in step S208 (step S208; No), a valid game ball winning in the first start winning opening is detected by the first start opening switch 22A. In response to this, it is determined whether or not the second start winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value (step S211). At this time, if the second start winning determination count value does not reach the winning determination value (step S211; No), a valid game ball winning to the second start winning opening is detected by the second start opening switch 22B. In response to the absence, the start winning determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if the second start winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value (step S211; Yes), the start port buffer value is set to “2” (step S212). Further, the second start winning determination counter is cleared and the count value is initialized to “0” (step S213).

  After executing one of the processes of Steps S210 and S213, the CPU 103 reads the pending storage number count value corresponding to the start port buffer value (Step S214). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the first reserved memory number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 is read, and the starting port buffer value is When it is “2”, the second reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 is read. Then, it is determined whether or not the read value in step S214 has reached a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) (step S215 in FIG. 27). At this time, if the read value in step S214 does not reach the upper limit value, the starting condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is effectively established. For example, after it is determined in step S208 shown in FIG. 26 that the first start winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value, it is determined in step S215 that the read value has not reached the upper limit value. The first start condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the one special symbol display device 4A and the variable display of the decorative symbol is established. When it is determined in step S211 shown in FIG. 26 that the second start winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value and then it is determined in step S215 that the read value has not reached the upper limit value, The second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the two special symbol display device 4B and the variable display of the decorative symbol is established.

  Thus, when the read value has not reached the upper limit value in step S215 (step S215; No), 1 is added to the reserved storage number count value corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S216). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, 1 is added to the first reserved memory number count value, and when the starting port buffer value is “2”, 1 is added to the second reserved memory number count value. Then, the CPU 103 adds 1 to the total pending storage number count value that is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter that indicates the total pending storage number that is the total value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number ( Step S217).

  Subsequent to the processing of step S217, the CPU 103, among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter, the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the variation pattern Numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for type determination is extracted (step S218). Numeric data indicating each random number extracted in this way is set as reserved data at the beginning of the empty entry in the special figure storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value, thereby storing each random value (step S219). . For example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 is set in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, while when the start port buffer value is “2”, Numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are set in the second special figure storage unit 151B.

  After the random number value is stored in step S219, the reserved memory number designation command corresponding to the reserved memory number count value corresponding to the starting port buffer value updated in step S216 is transmitted to the effect control board 12. Setting is performed (step S220). For example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, the storage address of the first reserved memory number designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, and the first reserved memory is stored. Configure settings for sending number specification commands. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is “2”, the storage address of the second reserved storage number designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, and 2. Setting for transmitting the reserved memory number designation command. The reserved memory number designation command set in this way is performed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 24 after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. Is transmitted.

  After the setting in step S220, for example, the storage address of the reserved storage number designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the effect control board 12 by storing it in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. Settings for transmitting the number designation command are performed (step S221). The reserved memory number designation command set in this way is performed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 24 after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. Is transmitted.

  When the read value has reached the upper limit value in step S215 (step S215; Yes), after executing the process of step S221, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is “1” or “2”. Determination is made (step S222). At this time, if the start port buffer value is “1” (step S222; “1”), whether or not the time reduction flag is set (step S225) and the special figure process flag is 4 or more, that is, a big hit It is determined whether or not the control or the small hit control is being performed (step S226). If both are “No”, the process proceeds to step S227, and the effect determination process at the time of winning is performed. On the other hand, if either one is “Yes”, the start port buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to “0” without going through Step S227 (Step S228). The process proceeds to step S211 shown.

  On the other hand, when the starting port buffer value is “2” (step S222; “2”), the processing proceeds unconditionally to step S223, and after performing the winning effect determining process shown in FIG. Is cleared, the stored value is initialized to “0” (step S224), and the start winning determination process is terminated.

  In this embodiment, when the processes of steps S225 and S226 are executed, and there is an effective start winning at the first start winning opening, the gaming state is the normal state or the latent probability changing state. In some cases, the winning effect determination process in step S227 is executed only during the period when the big hit or the small hit control is not executed, so that the notice effect is performed by the hold storage display by the effect control board 12. It should be noted that the process may not be shifted to step S227 only when the game state is a big hit game state, and may be made to move to step S227 to execute the winning effect determination process when the game state is a small hit game state.

  Further, in this embodiment, when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B detect the start winning of the game ball that is effective at the same time, by the processing executed within 2 milliseconds, A process based on the fact that both of the switches have detected a start winning of a valid game ball is executed. That is, when it is determined in step S208 shown in FIG. 26 that the first start winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value, the processing of steps S209, S210, and S214 shown in FIG. 26, after the processing of step S228 is executed in response to the fact that the start port buffer value is “1” in step S222, the processing of step S211 shown in FIG. Proceed to processing. And when it determines with the 2nd start winning determination count value having reached the winning determination value in step S211, after performing the process of step S212-S214 shown in FIG. 26, step S215-S221 shown in FIG. After executing the above process, the process of step S224 is executed in response to the start port buffer value being “2” in step S222, and then the start winning determination process is terminated. Thereby, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B detect the start winning of the game balls that are effective at the same time, the processing based on the detection of both effective start winnings can be completed reliably.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the winning effect determination process in step S223 or step S227. In the winning effect determination process, first, the CPU 103 first stores the random number MR1 stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A or the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B and the normal state shown in the special figure display result determination table 130 in step S219. Or it compares with the jackpot judgment value corresponding to a time-short state, and it is confirmed whether they correspond (step S420). In this embodiment, at the timing of starting the variation of the special symbol and the production symbol, whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol normal processing described later, determining the type of big hit or changing the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting processing Separately, at the timing when the game ball starts to win at the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening, before the variable display based on the start winning starts, By executing the effect determination process, it is confirmed in advance which variation pattern type is to be used. By doing so, the variation pattern type is specified in advance before the variation display of the effect symbol is executed, and as described later, based on the determination result at the time of winning, the effect control CPU 120 performs super reach or A continuous production is performed in which a big hit is announced by changing the display mode of the corresponding hold display.

  If the random value MR1 does not match the jackpot determination value in the normal state or the short time state (No in step S420), the CPU 103 checks whether or not a probability change flag indicating that the gaming state is a probability change state is set. (Step S421). If the probability variation flag is set, the CPU 103 compares the random number MR1 with the jackpot determination value corresponding to the probability variation state in the special figure display result determination table 130, and confirms whether or not they match (step S422). ).

  If the random value MR1 does not match the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change (No in step S422), the CPU 103 compares the random value MR1 with the small hit determination value in the special figure display result determination table 130, and they match. It is confirmed whether or not to perform (step S423).

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the small hit determination value (No in step S423), the CPU 103 performs a process of determining the current gaming state (step S424). In this embodiment, in step S424, the CPU 103 determines whether the gaming state is a normal state, a high base state in which the time reduction flag is set, or a latent probability changing state in which only the probability changing flag is set. Determine. In addition, the CPU 103 identifies the total number of pending storage.

  Then, the CPU 103 sets a variation pattern type determination table for loss according to the determination result of step S424 (step S425). Specifically, if the CPU 103 determines that the gaming state is the normal state, the CPU 103 sets the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133A shown in FIG. When it is determined that the gaming state is the high base state, the loss variation pattern type determination table (high base) 133B shown in FIG. 12B is set. When it is determined that the gaming state is the latent probability changing state, the loss variation pattern type determination table (latent probability changing) 133C shown in FIG. 12C is set.

  On the other hand, if the random value MR1 matches the small hit determination value (Yes in step S423), the CPU 103 sets the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132B shown in FIG. 11B (step S426).

  When the random value MR1 matches the jackpot determination value in step S420 or step S422, the CPU 103 compares the random number MR2 stored together with the random value MR1 with the jackpot type determination table 131 to determine whether the jackpot type is the jackpot type. Is determined to be “non-probable variation big hit”, “probable variation big hit” or “suddenly probable big hit” (step S427), and a big hit variation pattern type determination table is set (step S428).

  Next, the CPU 103 uses the variation pattern type determination table set in steps S425, S426, and S428, the jackpot type specified in step S427, and the random number value MR3 stored together with the random number values MR1 and MR2. The pattern type is determined (step S429).

  Then, the CPU 103 performs processing for setting the determined variation pattern type in the winning determination result designation command (step S430). For example, if there is a start winning at the first start winning opening and it is determined as “non-reach loss” in step S429, the winning determination result specifying command EXT composed of MODE data “94 (H)” is selected. A process of setting “00 (H)” to the data is performed. If it is determined in step S429 that “normal reach loss”, a process of setting “01 (H)” to the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command composed of MODE data “94 (H)” is performed. . If it is determined in step S429 that “super reach loss”, a process of setting “02 (H)” in the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command composed of MODE data “94 (H)” is performed. . If it is determined in step S429 that “normal reach big hit”, a process of setting “03 (H)” in the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command composed of MODE data “94 (H)” is performed. . If it is determined in step S429 that “super reach big hit”, processing for setting “04 (H)” to the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command composed of MODE data “94 (H)” is performed. Do. If there is a start winning at the second start winning opening, if it is determined as “non-reach loss” in step S429, a winning determination result designation command composed of MODE data “94 (H)”. The process of setting “05 (H)” to the EXT data of the file is performed. If it is determined as “normal reach loss” in step S429, a process of setting “06 (H)” to the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command composed of the MODE data “94 (H)” is performed. . If it is determined in step S429 that “super reach loss”, a process of setting “07 (H)” to the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command composed of MODE data “94 (H)” is performed. . If it is determined in step S429 that “normal reach big hit”, processing for setting “08 (H)” to the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command composed of MODE data “94 (H)” is performed. . If it is determined in step S429 that “super reach big hit”, processing for setting “09 (H)” to the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command composed of MODE data “94 (H)” is performed. Do. In addition, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the determined variation pattern type in the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command, and performs transmission setting of the winning determination result designation command in which the EXT data is set (S430). . The winning determination result designation command for which these transmission settings have been made is performed, for example, by executing the command control processing in step S27 shown in FIG. Is transmitted.

  After executing the start winning determination process in step S101 shown in FIG. Execute the process.

  The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol are based on the presence / absence of reserved data stored in the first special symbol reservation storage unit 151A and the second special diagram reservation storage unit 151B. It is determined whether or not to start the special game using the display device 4B. In the special symbol normal process, whether or not the variable symbol display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set to “big hit” or “small hit” based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. It is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, in response to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, the confirmed special symbol (big hit symbol, the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B) Either a small hit symbol or a lost symbol) is set.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. This variation pattern setting process includes a process for determining the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types based on the result of determining whether the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. Corresponding to the determination result of the pattern type, processing for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns is included.

  The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. This special symbol variation process includes a process for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure For example, every time the special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed, the special diagram variation timer value, which is the stored value in the special diagram variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153, is subtracted or incremented by one. Regardless of whether the game is a special game using the first special graphic by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special game using the second special graphic by the second special symbol display device 4B, a common timer is used. The elapsed time is measured. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached a special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. As described above, the special symbol variation process in step S112 is performed by the first special symbol display device 4A using the first special symbol in the special symbol game or the second special symbol display device 4B. It suffices if it is a process for controlling the variation of the special symbol in the special figure game using the game by a common processing routine. When the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In the special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B stops the change of the special symbol, and the fixed special symbol which is the variable symbol display result is stopped and displayed. A process for setting is included. Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag or the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is on. When the big hit flag is on, the special process flag value is set to “ Update to 4 ". When the small hit flag is on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. Further, when both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are OFF, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The big hit release pre-processing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit release pre-processing includes a process for starting the execution of the round in the big hit gaming state and setting the big winning opening to the open state based on the fact that the variable display result becomes “big hit”, etc. include. At this time, for example, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened may be set in accordance with whether the big hit type is “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change”. As an example, when the big hit type is controlled to 15 rounds big hit state corresponding to “non-probability change” or “probability change”, the upper limit of the period in which the big winning opening is opened is set to “29 seconds”. In addition to the setting, the number of times of opening of the big winning opening, which is the number of round games executed, is set to “15 times”. On the other hand, when the big hit type is controlled to be “surprise” and is controlled to the two round big hit state, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “0.5 seconds”. At the same time, the number of times of opening of the big prize opening, which is the number of round games executed, is set to “2 times”.

  The big hit release processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In the big hit opening process, the winning prize opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is in the open state, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. The process etc. which determine whether it became the timing which returns to a closed state from an open state are included. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, a process for stopping the supply of the solenoid driving signal to the special winning opening door solenoid 82 may be executed.

  The big hit release post-processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-hit opening process, the process of determining whether or not the number of rounds in which the winning opening is in the open state has reached the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening, or the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening has been reached. In some cases, a process for performing a setting for transmitting an end designation command is included.

  The big hit end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In the jackpot end process, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed by an effect device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 or the like. Processing that waits until time elapses and processing that performs various settings for controlling to a probable change state and a short time state corresponding to the jackpot type are included.

  The small hit pre-release process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This pre-opening process for small hits is a setting for starting the execution of variable winning action in the small hit game state and opening the big winning opening based on the fact that the variable display result is “small hit”, etc. The processing to perform is included. At this time, for example, in response to the variable display result being “small hit”, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “0.5 seconds”, and the big winning opening in the variable winning operation is set. The number of times of opening may be set to “twice”.

  The small hit releasing process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In the small hit opening process, the process for measuring the elapsed time since the big prize opening is in the open state, and the timing for returning the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time, etc. The process etc. which determine whether or not were included are included. When returning the big prize opening to the closed state, a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door may be executed.

  The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. In this small hit end process, there is a waiting time corresponding to a period during which a presentation operation for informing the end of the small hit gaming state is performed by an effect device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 or the like. It includes processing to wait until it has passed. Here, when the small hit gaming state is finished, the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued without changing the state of the probability change flag and the short time flag.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol normal process executed in step S110 of FIG. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 29, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure is “0” (step S231). For example, in the process of step S231, the game control counter setting unit 154 reads the second reserved memory number count value stored in the second reserved memory number counter, and determines whether or not the read value is “0”. That's fine.

  When the number of reserved figures stored in the special figure game using the second special figure is other than “0” in step S231 (step S231; No), the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B corresponds to the reserved number “1”. As the stored data, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type are read out (step S232). . The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S232, for example, by subtracting and updating the second reserved memory number count value, the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure is updated to be decremented by one. In the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B, reservation data indicating random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than the reservation number “1” (for example, entries corresponding to the reservation numbers “2” to “4”) are stored. One entry is shifted upward (step S233).

  Then, the transmission setting of the second reserved memory number designation command based on the second reserved memory number count value after the subtraction update is performed (step S233 +). Further, in the process of step S233, the game control counter setting unit 154 may update the total reserved memory number count value stored in the total reserved memory number counter by one. At this time, the value of the variation special figure designation buffer is updated to “2” (step S234).

  When the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure is “0” in step S231 (step S231; Yes), the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure is “0”. It is determined whether or not (step S235). For example, in the process of step S235, the game control counter setting unit 154 reads the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter, and determines whether or not the read value is “0”. That's fine. As described above, the process of step S235 is executed when it is determined in step S231 that the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure is “0”, and the first special figure is used. It is determined whether or not the number of stored special game games is “0”. Therefore, execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure.

  When the number of reserved figures stored in the special figure game using the first special figure is other than “0” in step S235 (step S235; No), the first special figure reserved memory unit 151A corresponds to the reserved number “1”. As the stored data, numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type are read out (step S236). . The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S236, for example, by updating the first reserved memory number count value by subtracting 1 and updating it, the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure is updated so as to be reduced by 1. In the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, reservation data indicating random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than the reservation number “1” (for example, entries corresponding to the reservation numbers “2” to “4”) are stored. One entry is shifted upward (step S237).

  Then, transmission setting of the first reserved memory number designation command based on the first reserved memory number count value after the subtraction update is performed (step S237 +). Further, in the process of step S237, the game control counter setting unit 154 may update the total pending storage number count value stored in the total pending storage number counter by one. At this time, the value of the variation special figure designation buffer is updated to “1” (step S238).

  After executing any of the processes of steps S234 and S238, it is determined whether to display the special figure variable display result, which is the variable symbol display result, as “big hit”, “small hit”, or “losing”. As the usage table, the special figure display result determination table 130 is selected and set (step S239). The CPU 103 refers to the special figure display result determination table 130 set in this way, so that the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for variation is “big hit” or “small”. Whether to display the special figure display result as "big hit", "small hit", or "lose" depending on which of the decision values assigned to each special figure display result of "Bon" or "Lose" Is determined (step S240). At this time, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result determined in step S240 is “big hit” (step S241).

  If it is determined in step S241 that it is a “hit” (step S241; Yes), the big win flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (step S242). At this time, the big hit type determination table 131 is selected and set as a use table for determining the big hit type as one of a plurality of types (step S243). By referring to the big hit type determination table 131 set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for determining the big hit type stored in the random number buffer for variation becomes “non-probability change”, “probability change”, “surprise change”. Depending on which of the determined values assigned to each jackpot type is matched, it is determined whether the jackpot type is “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change” (step S244). Here, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “2” in the process of step S234, the decision value is not assigned to the big hit type of “surprise” in the big hit type decision table 131. Therefore, the jackpot type is not determined as “surprising”. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value that is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (step S245), the determined jackpot type Remember. As an example, if the big hit type is “non-probable change”, the big hit type buffer value may be “0”, “probable change” may be “1”, and “surprise” may be “2”.

  When it is determined in step S241 that it is not “big hit” (step S241; No), it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is “small hit” (step S246). When it is determined that the game is “small hit” (step S246; Yes), the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (step S247).

  If it is determined in step S246 that the game is not “small hit” (step S246; No), or after performing any of the processes in steps S245 and S247, whether to control the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. A determined special symbol is set in accordance with the result of the prior determination as to whether or not, and further, the determination result of the jackpot type when the jackpot game state is set (step S248). As an example, when it is determined in step S246 that the special figure display result is not “small hit”, a lost symbol is obtained corresponding to the pre-determined result indicating that the special figure display result is “lost”. The special symbol indicating the symbol “−” is set as the confirmed special symbol. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S246 that the special figure display result is “small hit”, the small figure corresponding to the pre-determined result indicating that the special figure display result is “small hit”. The special symbol indicating the number “2” as the symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. When it is determined in step S241 that the special figure display result is “big hit”, the big hit symbols “1”, “3”, “7” are determined according to the big hit type determination result in step S244. Any of the special symbols indicating the numbers "" is set as the confirmed special symbol. That is, according to the determination result that the big hit type is “non-probable change”, the special symbol indicating the number “3” that becomes the non-probable big hit symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. Further, according to the determination result that the jackpot type is “probability change”, the special symbol indicating the number “7” that becomes the probability change big hit symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. In accordance with the determination result that the big hit type is “accuracy”, the special symbol indicating the number of the big hit symbol “1” is set as the confirmed special symbol.

  After the confirmed special symbol is set in step S248, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S249), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. . In step S235, when the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure is “0” (step S235; Yes), after performing a predetermined demonstration display setting (step S250), the special symbol is set. Normal processing ends. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is effect control from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not transmission to the substrate 12 has been completed. At this time, if the transmission has been completed, the demonstration display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is terminated.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process executed in step S111 of FIG. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 30, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S261). If the big hit flag is on (step S261; Yes), the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A is selected and set as a use table for determining the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types (step S262). ). Further, for example, by reading the jackpot type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155, it is specified whether the jackpot type is “non-probable change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change” (step S263). ).

  When the big hit flag is off in step S261 (step S261; No), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is on (step S264). If the small hit flag is on (step S264; Yes), the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132B is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of types of variation pattern types ( Step S265).

  When the small hit flag is off in step S264 (step S264; No), for example, by determining whether or not the time reduction flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is on, the probability variation state or time reduction is determined. In the state, it is determined whether or not the vehicle is in the high base where the time reduction control or the high opening control is performed (step S266). At this time, if the gaming state is not in the high base (step S266; No), the gaming state is determined by, for example, determining whether or not the probability variation flag provided in the gaming control flag setting unit 152 is on. It is determined whether or not the latent probability changing state that is in the probability changing state is not in the high base (step S267).

  If the game state is not in the latent probability change in step S267 (step S267; No), the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) is used as a use table for determining one of a plurality of variation pattern types. 133A is selected and set (step S268). Further, when the gaming state is in the high base in step S266 (step S266; Yes), the lost variation pattern type determination table (high) is used as a use table for determining one of a plurality of variation pattern types. Base) 133B is selected and set (step S269). If the gaming state is changing the latent probability in step S267 (step S267; Yes), the lost variation pattern type determination table (latent probability changing in progress) is used as a use table for determining one of a plurality of variation pattern types. ) 133C is selected and set (step S270).

  After executing any of the processes of steps S263, S265, and S268 to S270, for example, based on numerical data indicating a random value MR3 for determining a variation pattern type stored in a random number buffer for variation or the like, By referring to the set variation pattern type determination table, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S271). Here, in the process of step S271, the variation pattern type of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A based on the establishment of the first start condition is determined. Whether or not to determine the variation pattern type of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied. First, using the numerical data indicating the common random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type updated by a common random counter or the like, the variation pattern type may be determined as one of a plurality of types by a common processing module. it can. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the variation pattern type may not be extracted at the time of starting winning when the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening is detected, For example, it may be extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154 when the process of step S271 is executed.

  After the variation pattern type is determined in step S271, the loss variation pattern determination table 134A and the hit variation pattern determination are performed depending on whether the special figure display result is “lost”, “big hit”, or “small hit”. One of the tables 134B is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns (step S272). Subsequently, the variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types by referring to the variation pattern determination table set in step S272 based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern (step S273). The numerical data indicating the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern may be extracted from the random number circuit 104, the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, or the like when the process of step S273 is executed, or the first start winning prize The first special figure reservation storage unit 151A and the second special figure reservation memory together with the random numbers MR1 to MR3 are extracted at the start winning time when the game ball that has passed (entered) through the mouth and the second start winning opening is detected. You may memorize | store as pending data in the part 151B.

  In the process of step S273, whether the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed by using the first special symbol is determined by the first special symbol display device 4A based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied, Regardless of whether the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed by using the second special symbol is determined by the second special symbol display device 4B based on the establishment of the second starting condition, a common random Using the numerical data indicating the common random number MR4 that is used for determining the variation pattern updated by a counter or the like, the variation pattern can be determined as one of a plurality of types by a common processing module. Further, in the process of step S273, regardless of the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S271, a plurality of types of variation patterns are generated by a common processing module using numerical data indicating the common random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern. Either can be determined.

  After the change pattern is determined in step S273, a special figure change time which is a variable symbol display time corresponding to the change pattern determination result is set (step S274). Thereafter, according to the variable special symbol designation buffer value, the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. The setting for starting the variation of the special symbol is performed so as to start any of the above (step S275). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “1”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “2”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is performed.

  Subsequent to the process of step S275, settings for transmitting various commands for starting the special symbol change are performed (step S276). For example, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 103 sends a gaming state designation command, a first variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with setting data indicating a storage address (first address) in the ROM 101 of the first variation start command table prepared in advance in order to sequentially transmit the specified command and the pending storage number specifying command. In the designated transmission command buffer, the data is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 103 sends a gaming state designation command, a second variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the designated command and the pending storage number designation command, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second variation start command table prepared in advance is a buffer designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. Store in the area. When the setting in step S274 is performed, every time the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 24 is executed after the variation pattern setting process is completed, the main board 11 applies to the effect control board 12. Game state designation command, first variation start command or second variation start command, variation pattern designation command, variable display result designation command, first pending memory number designation command, second pending memory number designation command, total pending memory number designation command The winning determination result designation command is sequentially transmitted. The order in which these effect control commands are transmitted can be arbitrarily changed. For example, after the variable display result designation command is first transmitted, the first variation start command, the second variation start command, or the variation pattern designation command is transmitted. Alternatively, it may be transmitted in the order of the game state designation command and the pending storage number designation command. Thereafter, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation process (step S277), and then the fluctuation pattern setting process is terminated.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop process executed in step S113 of FIG. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 31, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not a special figure fixed display flag provided in, for example, the game control flag setting unit 152 is on (step S291). Here, the special figure fixed display flag is set to the on state by the process of step S295 described later in response to the fixed special symbol that is the variable display result in the special figure game being derived and displayed.

  When the special figure fixed display flag is OFF in step S291 (step S291; No), settings for deriving and displaying the fixed special symbol are performed (step S292). At this time, a setting for transmitting a decorative symbol stop command to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S293). Also, a predetermined time (for example, 1000 milliseconds) is set as the special figure confirmation display time (step S294). For example, in the process of step S294, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the special figure confirmation display time may be set in the game control process timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153. Then, after the special figure confirmation display flag is set to the on state (step S295), the special symbol stop process is terminated. Thus, after the fixed special symbol is derived and displayed by the process of step S292, the special symbol process processing according to the occurrence of the timer interrupt is performed until the special symbol fixed display time set in step S294 elapses. Each time the stop process is executed, it is determined in step S291 that the special figure fixed display flag is on.

  If the special figure confirmation display flag is ON in step S291 (step S291; Yes), it is determined whether or not the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed (step S296). For example, in the process of step S296, the game control process timer value that is the stored value of the game control process timer in which the timer initial value is set by the process of step S294 is read, and whether or not the timer value has become “0”. Accordingly, it may be determined whether or not the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed. If the timer value is a value other than “0”, the game control process timer value is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time the game control timer interrupt process is executed based on the occurrence of the timer interrupt. That's fine. If the special figure confirmation display time has not elapsed in step S296 (step S296; No), the special symbol stop process is terminated to wait until the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed.

  When the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed in step S296 (step S296; Yes), after clearing the special figure confirmation display flag to turn it off (step S297), it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is on. Determination is made (step S298). At this time, if the big hit flag is on (step S298; Yes), a predetermined time is set as a big hit start production waiting time (step S299). In addition, a setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S300). For example, in the process of step S300, setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the hit start specifying command table prepared in advance for transmitting the hit start specifying command corresponding to the big hit type buffer value is transmitted in the transmission command buffer. What is necessary is just to store in the buffer area | region designated with the pointer.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S300, the big hit flag is cleared and turned off (step S301). In addition, a setting for ending the probability variation state and the time reduction state is performed (step S302). For example, as the processing in step S302, processing for clearing the probability variation flag and the time-short flag to turn off, processing for clearing the time-count counter for counting the remaining number of special game executed in the high base, etc. May be executed. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “4”, which is a value corresponding to the big hit release pre-processing (step S303), and then the special symbol stop process is terminated.

  When the big hit flag is off in step S298 (step S298; No), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is on (step S304). At this time, if the small hit flag is on (step S304; Yes), a predetermined time is set as a small hit start production waiting time (step S305). Subsequently, a setting for transmitting a hit start designation command corresponding to the special figure display result being “small hit” from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S306). Thereafter, the small hit flag is cleared and turned off (step S307). Also, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”, which is a value corresponding to the pre-opening process for small hits (step S308).

  If the small hit flag is OFF in step S304 (step S304; No), the special figure process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to “0” (step S309). After performing either of the processes of steps S308 and S309, it is determined whether or not the time reduction control or the high opening control in the high base is to be ended (step S310), and then the special symbol stop process is ended. . For example, in the process of step S310, when the time reduction flag is on, the time reduction count value which is the stored value of the time reduction counter is updated by subtracting 1 for example. Then, it is determined whether or not the updated short time count value matches a predetermined short time end determination value (for example, “0” or the like). At this time, if it coincides with the time reduction end determination value, the time reduction control or the high release control in the high base may be ended by clearing the time reduction flag and turning it off. On the other hand, if it does not coincide with the time reduction end determination value, the state of the time reduction flag may be maintained and the process of step S310 may be ended. It should be noted that even when the gaming state is the probability change state, if the time reduction flag is on, it is determined whether or not the time reduction control is to be ended, and the time reduction control may be ended based on the determination result of the end. Thus, while the time-shortening control is ended, the probability variation control may be continued until the next variable display result becomes “big hit”, or until a predetermined number of special game is executed. As a result, the gaming state can be changed to the latent probability. Alternatively, for the probability change state in which the time reduction flag is on and the probability change flag is on, the time reduction control may be continuously performed until the variable display result becomes “big hit”.

  In the process of step S310, for example, numerical data indicating a random value for probability variation control termination determination is extracted from a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, and probability variation control termination determination stored in the ROM 101 or the like in advance is performed. It may be determined whether or not the probability variation control is ended by referring to the table or when the number of executions of the special figure game during the probability variation control reaches a predetermined probability variation end determination value. On the other hand, in the process of step S310, the process for ending the probability variation control may not be executed, and the probability variation control may be continued until the next variable display result becomes “big hit”. Alternatively, the process of determining whether or not to end the probability variation control based on the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the probability variation control is determined (predetermined), for example, in step S240 shown in FIG. It may be executed before.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit end process executed in step S117 of FIG. In the jackpot end process shown in FIG. 32, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot end time effect waiting time has elapsed (step S321). As an example, in the big hit release post-processing in step S116 shown in FIG. 26, when the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “7”, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the big hit end presentation waiting time is set. Set to the game control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S321, for example, the game control process timer value is updated by subtracting 1 or the like, and the updated game control process timer value matches a predetermined waiting time elapsed determination value (for example, “0” or the like). Whether or not the big hit end production waiting time has elapsed may be determined according to whether or not the game has been done. If the big hit end presentation waiting time has not elapsed in step S321 (step S321; No), the big hit end processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when the big hit end presentation waiting time has elapsed in step S321 (step S321; Yes), the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is read (step S322). , It is specified whether the big hit type is "non-probability change", "probability change", or "surprise change". At this time, it is determined whether or not the identified jackpot type is “uncertain change” (step S323).

  When it is determined in step S323 that the big hit type is “non-probable change” (step S323; Yes), a setting for starting the control for changing the gaming state to the short-time state is performed (step S324). For example, the CPU 103 sets the time reduction flag to the on state, and sets a predetermined count initial value (for example, “100”) corresponding to the upper limit value of the special figure game that can be executed in the time reduction state to the time reduction counter Set to. On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit type is “probability change” or “probability” (step S323; No), setting for starting the control for changing the gaming state to the probability change state is performed (step S325). For example, the CPU 103 sets both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag to the on state.

  It should be noted that settings may be made for controlling the probability variation state of different types depending on whether the jackpot type is determined to be “probability change” or the case where the jackpot type is determined to be “probability”. As an example, if the jackpot type is determined to be “probability change”, both the probability change flag and the time reduction flag are set to the on state, the initial value of the time reduction count value is not set, and the special figure display result is It is set so that both the probability variation control and the time reduction control are continuously performed until the “big hit” is reached. On the other hand, when the big hit type is determined to be “surprise accuracy”, both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are set to the on state, and the initial value of the time reduction count value is the same as in the case of controlling to the time reduction state The probability variation control is continuously performed until the special figure display result becomes “big hit”, while the time reduction control is continued until the number of executions of the special figure game reaches a predetermined number (for example, “100”). You may set as follows. Alternatively, when the big hit type is determined to be “surprise accuracy”, if the predetermined short-and-short-term accuracy flag is on, the setting for starting the short-time control is performed together with the probability variation control, while the short- and middle-range accuracy flag is off. If there is, a setting for starting only the probability variation control may be performed. Here, for example, when it is determined in step S298 shown in FIG. 31 that the big hit flag is on, the big hit type is “clash probability” and the short time flag is on. Corresponding to the control being performed, the on state may be set. Alternatively, for example, when the big hit type is determined to be “surprise” in step S244 shown in FIG. 29, a variable symbol such as a special symbol is displayed corresponding to the fact that the hour / hour flag is on and the hour / hour control is performed. When started, the short / medium rush accuracy flag may be set to the on state.

  After executing one of the processes in steps S324 and S325, the special figure process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to “0” (step S326), and then the jackpot end process is terminated.

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 33 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12 to the effect control board 12. Performs register settings for the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S72). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S72; No), the process of step S72 is repeatedly executed and waits.

  On the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the production control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interruption that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a control signal that becomes an effect control command from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. Capture. The effect control command captured at this time is stored, for example, in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194. As an example, when the production control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the production control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S72 (step S72; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S73), and command analysis processing is executed (step S74). In the command analysis process executed in step S74, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the reading is performed. Settings and control corresponding to the issued effect control command are performed.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S74, an effect control process is executed (step S75). In the effect control process in step S75, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and a decoration LED, a shutter With respect to the control contents of the rendering operation using various rendering devices such as 38H, 38L and the rendering model driving operation, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like.

  Following the effect control process in step S75, an effect random number update process is executed (step S76), and random numbers counted by the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 are used as various random values used for effect control. The numerical data shown is updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S72.

  34 to 36 are flowcharts showing an example of processing executed in step S74 of FIG. 33 as command analysis processing. In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). When read, the value of the read pointer is incremented by +2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that reading is performed every 2 bytes (1 command).

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 120 stores the variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

  If the received presentation control command is a variable display result designation command (step S617), the presentation control CPU 120 stores the variable display result designation command in a variable display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM ( Step S618).

  If the received effect control command is a decorative symbol stop command (step S619), the effect control CPU 120 sets a decorative symbol stop command reception flag (step S620).

  If the received effect control command is a hit start designation command (step S621), the effect control CPU 120 sets a hit start designation command reception flag corresponding to the hit type specified from the EXT data (step S622).

  If the received effect control command is the first variation start command (step S623), the first variation start command reception flag is set (step S624). If the received effect control command is the second variation start command (step S625), the second variation start command reception flag is set (step S626).

  If the received effect control command is a hit end designation command (step S627), the effect control CPU 120 sets a hit end designation command reception flag corresponding to the hit type specified from the EXT data (step S628).

  If the received effect control command is a power-on specification command (initialization specification command) (step S629), the effect control CPU 120 performs initialization after performing the shutter position initialization process (step S630) shown in FIG. Control is performed to display an initial screen indicating that the processing has been executed on the image display device 5 (step S631). The initial screen includes an initial display of predetermined production symbols.

  If the received effect control command is a power failure recovery designation command (step S632), a predetermined power failure recovery screen (screen for displaying information notifying the player that the gaming state is continuing) is displayed. Control is performed (step S634), and a power failure recovery flag is set (step S635).

  If the received effect control command is a gaming state designation command (step S636), a gaming state flag corresponding to the gaming state is set (step S637). Specifically, if the gaming state designation command designates the normal state, the effect control CPU 120, if set, the probability variation state flag indicating that the gaming state is the certain variation state, or the gaming state is Reset the time-short state flag indicating that the time-short state. Further, if the received gaming state designation command designates the time reduction state, the effect control CPU 120 sets only the time reduction state flag. Further, if the received game state designation command designates the probability variation state, the effect control CPU 120 sets a probability variation state flag and a short state flag. If the received game state designation command designates the latent probability changing state, the effect control CPU 120 sets only the probability changing state flag.

  If the received effect control command is the first reserved memory number designation command or the second reserved memory number designation command (step S638), the effect control CPU 120 performs the retained memory update process shown in FIG. 38 (step 639). ), A continuous production start setting process is executed (step S639 ′).

  If the received effect control command is the total reserved memory number designation command (step S640), the effect control CPU 120 uses the effect control counter based on the second byte data (EXT data) of the total reserved memory number designation command. The value of the total reserved memory number counter (total number of reserved memories) in the setting unit 193 is updated (step S641).

  If the received effect control command is a time reduction number designation command (step S642), the effect control CPU 120 in the effect control counter setting unit 193 based on the second byte data (EXT data) of the time reduction number designation command. The value of the time reduction counter (time reduction number) is updated (step S643). That is, the effect control CPU 120 stores the remaining number of times in the time-saving state indicated by the time-saving number designation command.

  If the received effect control command is a special winning opening open designation command (step S645), the effect control CPU 120 sets a special winning opening open flag (step S646).

  If the received effect control command is a designation command after opening the big prize opening (step S647), the production control CPU 120 sets a flag after opening the big prize opening (step S648).

  Next, if the received effect control command is a winning determination result designation command, the effect control CPU 120 sets a flag corresponding to the received winning determination result designation command.

  For example, if the received effect control command is a winning determination result 1 designation command (step S665), specifically, “00 (H)” is designated in the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command. In step S666, the effect control CPU 120 sets a winning determination result 0 flag indicating that it has been determined that a “non-reach lose” has occurred at the time of starting winning the first starting winning opening.

  If the received effect control command is a winning determination result 2 designation command (step S667), specifically, “01 (H)” is designated in the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command. In step S668, the effect control CPU 120 sets a winning determination result 1 flag indicating that it has been determined that a “normal reach lose” has occurred at the time of starting winning at the first starting winning opening.

  If the received effect control command is a winning determination result 3 designation command (step S669), specifically, “02 (H)” is designated in the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command. In step S670, the effect control CPU 120 sets a winning determination result 2 flag indicating that it has been determined that a “super reach loss” has occurred at the time of starting winning the first starting winning opening.

  If the received effect control command is a winning determination result 4 designation command (step S671), specifically, “03 (H)” is designated in the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command. In step S672, the effect control CPU 120 sets a winning determination result 3 flag indicating that it is determined that “per normal reach” is determined at the time of starting winning at the second starting winning opening.

  If the received effect control command is a winning determination result 5 designation command (step S673), specifically, “04 (H)” is designated in the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command. In step S674, the effect control CPU 120 sets a winning determination result 4 flag indicating that it is determined that “per super-reach” at the time of starting winning at the second starting winning opening.

  If the received effect control command is a winning determination result 6 designation command (step S675), specifically, “05 (H)” is designated in the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command. In step S676, the effect control CPU 120 sets a winning determination result 5 flag indicating that it has been determined that a “non-reach loss” has occurred at the time of starting winning in the second starting winning opening.

  If the received effect control command is a winning determination result 7 designation command (step S677), specifically, “06 (H)” is designated in the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command. In step S678, the effect control CPU 120 sets a winning determination result 6 flag indicating that it has been determined that “normal reach loss” has occurred at the time of starting winning in the second starting winning opening.

  If the received effect control command is a winning determination result 8 designation command (step S679), specifically, “07 (H)” is designated in the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command. In step S680, the effect control CPU 120 sets a winning determination result 7 flag indicating that it has been determined that a “super reach loss” has occurred at the time of starting winning the second starting winning opening.

  If the received effect control command is a winning determination result 9 designation command (step S681), specifically, “08 (H)” is designated in the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command. In step S682, the effect control CPU 120 sets a winning determination result 8 flag indicating that it is determined that “per normal reach” is determined at the time of starting winning the second starting winning opening.

  If the received effect control command is a winning determination result 10 designation command (step S683), specifically, “09 (H)” is designated in the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command. In step S684, the effect control CPU 120 sets a winning determination result 9 flag indicating that it is determined that “per super reach” at the time of starting winning at the second starting winning opening.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets a winning determination result flag according to the received winning determination result designation command.

  If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 120 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S685). Then, control goes to a step S611.

  Here, the pending storage update process performed in step S639 will be described below with reference to FIG. Since the contents of the process are the same for the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory, the contents for the second are omitted by describing them in parentheses.

  First, it is specified whether the received production control command is the first reserved memory number designation command or the second reserved memory number designation command, that is, the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory (step). S900).

  Then, the first (2) reserved storage number specified by the received first (2) reserved storage number designation command and the first (2) specified from the data stored in the special figure reservation storage unit 195 at that time 2) Compare with the number of reserved memories, whether the first (2) number of reserved memories specified by the received first (2) reserved memory number designation command is one, that is, the received first (2) The value obtained by subtracting the first (2) reserved memory number specified from the data stored in the special figure reserved memory unit 195 from the first (2) reserved memory number specified by the reserved memory number designation command. It is determined whether or not “1”.

  When the increased first (second) reserved storage number is 1 (Yes in step S901), the lowest order ("0" indicating no winning is stored in the first (2) reserved storage unit) After the pending data is stored in the storage area of the highest ranking among the storage areas, the pending storage display update process is performed in which the pending display portion corresponding to the saving area storing the pending data is lit in white (step S903). The process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the first (second) reserved memory number increased in step S901 is not 1 (No in step S901), that is, for example, when the reserved memory number is increased or subtracted by 2 or more, a hold error has occurred. After setting a hold non-display flag for hiding the hold display part as a thing (step S903), the process is terminated.

  Next, the continuous effect start setting process executed in step S639 'will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the continuous effect start setting process executed in step S639 'of FIG. In the continuous effect start setting process shown in FIG. 39, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the hold non-display flag is on, that is, whether or not a hold error has occurred (step S701).

  Note that the hold non-display flag is set when the first (second) hold storage number is not increased by 1 in step S901, and is turned off when a predetermined reset operation is performed thereafter. In addition, when the hold non-display flag is set, all the hold display units are turned off and in the non-display state in a continuous effect process (step S169) described later, and a hold error occurs in the image display device 5, for example. An error message is displayed indicating that this has occurred.

  When the hold non-display flag is off (step S701; No), it is determined whether or not the continuous production in-progress flag provided in the production control flag setting unit 191 is on (step S703). The continuous effect flag is set to the on state when the continuous effect pattern is determined and set by the processing of step S726, for example, and when the execution of the continuous effect ends (for example, in step S559 shown in FIG. 41). Processing) or when the continuous production being executed is interrupted (for example, step S169), and is turned off.

  When the continuous production flag is OFF in step S703 (step S703; No), it is determined whether or not the target reserved storage number is 4 (step S704). In the process of step S704, the special figure storage unit 195 confirms whether or not the pending data is stored in the entry of the pending number 4 corresponding to the first special figure. What is necessary is just to determine whether there exists.

  When the number of reserved storages is 4 in step S704 (step S704; Yes), the continuous effect determination table shown in FIG. 16A is set (step S705) and, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the effect control counter setting unit Numerical data indicating the random value SR1 for determining the continuous performance is extracted from the random counter 193 or the like (step S706). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR1 extracted in step S706, it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous effect by referring to the continuous effect determination table set in step S705 (step S707).

  Subsequently, in step S707, it is determined whether or not a decision to execute the continuous effect has been made (step S708). When it is determined in step S708 that the continuous production is not to be executed (step S708; No), and when the hold non-display flag is on in step S701 (step S701; Yes), the continuous production flag in step S703. Is ON (step S703; Yes), and if the target reserved memory number is not 4 in step S704 (step S704; No), the process proceeds to step S728 because the continuous effect is not executed.

  When it is determined in step S708 that a continuous effect is to be executed (step S708; Yes), the continuous effect type determination table shown in FIG. 18 is set (step S709) and, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the effect control counter setting unit 193 is set. Numerical data indicating the random value SR2 for determining the continuous effect is extracted from a random counter or the like (step S710). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR2 extracted in step S710, the continuous effect type (any of patterns A to C) is determined by referring to the continuous effect type determination table set in step S709. (Step S711).

  Further, the continuous effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 19 is set (step S712), and numerical data indicating the random number SR3 for determining the continuous effect is obtained from the random counter of the random number circuit 124 or the effect control counter setting unit 193, for example. Extract (step S713). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR3 extracted in step S713, the main pattern of the continuous effect is determined by referring to the continuous effect pattern determination table set in step S712 (step S714).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the main pattern of the continuous effect determined in step S714 is X1 or X2, that is, whether or not the continuous effect pattern changes when the lighting color is hold 4 or hold 3. (Step S715). When it is determined in step S715 that it is the continuous effect pattern X1 or X2, the continuous effect stop determination table shown in FIG. 20A is set (step S716) and, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the effect control counter setting unit 193 is set. From the random counter or the like, the numerical data indicating the random value SR4 for determining the continuous effect is extracted (step S717). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR4 extracted in step S717, it is determined whether or not to stop the continuous effect by referring to the continuous effect stop determination table set in step S716 (step S718). .

  Subsequently, in step S718, it is determined whether or not a decision to stop the continuous performance has been made (step S719). When it is determined in step S719 that the continuous effect is to be canceled (step S719; Yes), the continuous effect stop timing determination table shown in FIG. 20B is set (step S720) and, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the effect control counter is set. Numeric data indicating the random value SR5 for determining the continuous production stop timing is extracted from the random counter of the setting unit 193 (step S721). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR5 extracted in step S721, by referring to the continuous effect stop timing determination table set in step S720, the timing for stopping the continuous effect is either hold 2 or hold 1 It is determined whether to do (step S722).

  When it is determined in step S719 that the continuous production is not to be stopped (step S719; No), the change start movement determination table shown in FIG. 21 is set (step S723) and, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the production control counter is set. Numerical data indicating the random value SR5 for determining the movement of the reserved accessory is extracted from the random counter of the setting unit 193 (step S724). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR5 extracted in step S724, it is determined whether or not to move the retained accessory at the start of the change by referring to the change start movement determination table set in step S723. (Step S725).

  Further, if it is determined in step S715 that the continuous effect pattern X1 or X2 has not been determined, that is, if a continuous effect pattern that changes when the lighting color is on hold 2 or hold 1 is determined, the continuous effect pattern is determined. Therefore, the process proceeds to step S726 as it is without determining whether or not to cancel. In addition, after the continuous production stop timing is determined in step S722, the process proceeds to step S726.

  And after setting the continuous production | presentation pattern determined based on the process of step S709-722 to the pending | holding data of the special figure holding | maintenance memory | storage part 195 (step S726), the flag during continuous production | presentation is set (step S727), step. Proceeding to S728, the winning determination result flag is cleared regardless of whether or not the continuous effect is executed (step S728), and the process is terminated.

  In step S724, since the continuous production stop timing is not determined, the random value SR5 for determining the continuous production stop timing is shared as the random value for determining the movement of the reserved accessory, but a separate random value is used. It may be used.

  37A shows a change mode of the hold display in the continuous effect pattern A, FIG. 37B shows a change mode of the hold display in the continuous effect pattern B, and FIG. Shows a change mode of the hold display in the continuous effect pattern C. Thus, in the pattern X-1 (X is any one of the patterns A, B, and C), the time for changing the display mode of the reserved memory is the reserved number 4 (at the time of starting winning), and the pattern X-2 is the reserved number 3 Pattern X-3 is reserved number 2, and pattern X-4 is reserved number 1. Further, the pattern X-11 or X-21 is a pattern for returning the display mode of the reserved storage to white with the reservation number 2, and the pattern X-12 or X-22 is to return the display mode of the storage with the reservation number 1 to white. It is a pattern.

  In this embodiment, the hold display in the continuous effect pattern A is white to blue, the hold display in the continuous effect pattern B is white to red, and the hold display in the continuous effect pattern C is white to rainbow. It may change, but it may be changed in multiple stages such as white, blue, red, rainbow, etc., for example, every time digestion is suspended, and in this case, it changes to a specific color (for example, rainbow) The pattern may be set so that the jackpot reliability is higher than the pattern that does not change to a specific color. Further, a pattern with a large number of color changes may be set so that the reliability of the big hit is higher than a pattern with a small number of changes.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the process executed in step S75 of FIG. 33 as the effect control process. In this effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 first performs a continuous effect process each time (step S169).

  In the continuous effect process in step S169, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect flag is set, that is, whether or not the continuous effect is being executed. It is determined whether or not a flag is set, that is, whether or not a hold error has occurred. If the hold non-display flag is not set, the continuous production pattern and the hold number stored in the hold data of the special figure hold storage unit 195 are compared with, for example, the hold display mode table shown in FIG. The hold display control for displaying the hold display portion to be displayed in the corresponding display color, and the first hold memory number display accessory 5D (second hold memory number display accessory 5U) from the vertical position by the angle movement according to the continuous effect pattern Drive control is performed.

  Also, if the hold non-display flag is set while the continuous production flag is set, that is, if a hold error occurs during execution of the continuous production, the set continuous production flag is cleared and held. The continuous effect that is being executed with the display unit hidden is interrupted. If the continuous effect flag is not set, the process is terminated.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when an error occurs in the reserved memory number specified from the reserved memory number designation command for some reason such as noise when receiving the reserved memory number designation command, the pending memory update process performs the pending memory update process. The continuous production is not newly executed until the non-display flag is set and the hold error is released. Therefore, for example, it is possible to avoid that the number of reserved memories becomes four by increasing the number of reserved memories by two (abnormal increase), and that the continuous effect is executed based on the reserved memories. In addition, even if a hold error occurs when a continuous effect has already been executed, the continuous effect being executed is interrupted, so that the continuous effect based on an abnormal hold display can be avoided. .

  After the continuous production process is completed in step S169, one of the following processes in steps S170 to S177 is selected and executed according to the value of the production process flag provided in the production control flag setting unit 191. To do.

  The decorative symbol variation start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. In this decorative symbol variation start waiting process, whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5 based on whether or not the first variation start command or the second variation start command from the main board 11 is received. It includes processing to determine whether or not. At this time, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1” in response to the determination to start variable display.

  The decorative symbol variation setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. This decorative symbol variation setting processing corresponds to the fact that the special symbol variable display is started in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. In order to perform various display operations and other various presentation operations, it includes a process of determining a definite decorative pattern and various presentation control patterns according to the variation pattern of the special symbol, the type of display result, and the like. After such determination and setting are performed, the value of the production process flag is updated to “2”.

  The decorative pattern changing process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the decorative symbol variation processing, the effect control CPU 120 reads various control data from the effect control pattern in response to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192, and Processing for performing various effects control during variable display is included. After performing such effect control, for example, when an end code indicating the end of variable display of decorative symbols is read from the symbol variation control pattern, or when a decorative symbol stop command transmitted from the main board 11 is received. Correspondingly, the finalized decorative symbol as the final stop symbol that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is displayed in a completely stopped manner. When the final decorative design is displayed in response to the end code being read from the design variation control pattern, the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command has elapsed. In addition, even if the production control command from the main board 11 is not used, it is possible to determine and display the variable display result by autonomously deriving and displaying the determined decorative pattern on the production control board 12 side. When the finalized decorative symbol is displayed as a complete stop, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The decorative symbol variation end process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In the decorative symbol variation end process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. When the hit start designation command is received and the hit start designation command designates the start of the big hit gaming state, the value of the effect process flag is a value corresponding to the effect process during the big hit control “4”. Update to "". On the other hand, when the hit start designation command is received, if the hit start designation command designates the start of the small hit gaming state, the value of the production process flag corresponds to the production process during the small hit control. The value is updated to “5”. When the production control process timer times out without receiving a hit start designation command, it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is “lost”, and the value of the production process flag is the initial value. Update to “0”.

  The effect processing during jackpot control in step S174 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In the big hit control effect processing, for example, a hit effect control pattern corresponding to the variable display result being “big hit” or the like is set, and an effect image based on the set content is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. Display the sound, sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and game effect is output by outputting the command (electric signal) to the lamp control board 14 Processing for controlling various performance operations in the big hit gaming state such as lighting / extinguishing / flashing the lamp 9 and the decoration LED is included. Then, for example, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “6” in response to receiving a hit end designation command transmitted from the main board 11.

  The effect process during small hitting control in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In the small hit effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the small hit gaming state, and displays an effect image based on the set content in the display area of the image display device 5. The sound and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and the game effect lamp 9 is output by outputting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect control in the small hit gaming state such as lighting / extinguishing / flashing the decoration LED is executed. In the small hit effect processing, for example, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “6” which is a value corresponding to the small hit end effect in response to receiving a hit end designation command from the main board 11. .

  The ending effect process in step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state, and displays an effect image based on the set contents in the display area of the image display device 5. Display the sound, sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and game effect is output by outputting the command (electric signal) to the lamp control board 14 Various effect control is executed at the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, such as turning on / off / flashing the lamp 9 or the decorative LED. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation setting process executed in step S171 of FIG. In the decorative symbol variation setting process shown in FIG. 41, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a final stop symbol determining process (step S552). FIG. 42 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the final stop symbol determination process executed in step S552. In the final stop symbol determination process shown in FIG. 42, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the EXT data in the variable display result designation command transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and the special figure display result is “lost”. It is determined whether or not (step S751). At this time, if it is determined that the special figure display result is “lost” (step S751; Yes), it is designated by reading the EXT data in the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11, for example. It is determined whether or not the variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern corresponding to a case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach” (step S752).

  If it is determined in step S752 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S752; Yes), after determining the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that will be the final stop symbols constituting the non-reach combination (step S753), The final stop symbol determination process is terminated. As an example, in the process of step S753, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the left determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. Further, by referring to a predetermined left determined symbol determination table, the left determined symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L on the display screen of the image display device 5 is determined among the determined decorative symbols. Next, a predetermined right determined symbol determination table preliminarily stored in the ROM 121 or the like is extracted by extracting numerical data indicating random values for determining the right determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. , Etc., the right confirmed decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R on the display screen of the image display device 5 is determined among the confirmed decorative symbols. At this time, the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol may be determined so as to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined symbol determining table or the like. Subsequently, numerical data indicating a random number for determining a medium fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. , Etc., the middle fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C on the display screen of the image display device 5 is determined among the fixed decorative symbols.

  If it is determined in step S752 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S752; No), a final decorative symbol combination that is a final stop symbol constituting the reach combination is determined (step S754), and the final The stop symbol determination process is terminated. As an example, in the process of step S754, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a left / right determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to the predetermined left / right determined symbol determination table, the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R on the display screen of the image display device 5 among the determined decorative symbols are stopped and displayed together. The decorative symbol with the same symbol number is determined. Further, numerical data indicating a random number for determining a medium fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is extracted. By referring to this, among the determined decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C on the display screen of the image display device 5 is determined. Here, for example, when the confirmed decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, such as when the symbol number of the middle confirmed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol, an arbitrary value (For example, “1”) may be added to or subtracted from the symbol number of the medium-decorated decorative symbol so that the finalized decorative symbol is not the jackpot combination but the reach combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium-decorated decorative symbol, the difference (design difference) between the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium-decorated decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. .

  When it is determined in step S751 that the special figure display result is not “lost” (step S751; No), the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, or the special figure display It is determined whether the result is “small hit” or other cases (step S755). At this time, if it is determined that the big hit type is “surprise” or the special figure display result is “small hit” (step S755; Yes), the big hit type such as one of the second opening chances TC1 to TC4 is “ After determining the combination of the determined decorative symbols that will be the variable display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the case of “Accuracy” or the special symbol display result of “Small hit” (step S756), the final stop symbol determining process is terminated. . As an example, corresponding to the case where any one of the variation patterns PC1-1 to PC1-3 is designated by the variation pattern designation command, the final stop symbols constituting any of the second opening chances TC1 to TC4 and The combination of the determined decorative design is determined. In this case, a predetermined chance index determination table preliminarily stored in the ROM 121 or the like is extracted by extracting numerical data indicating random numbers for chance index determination updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. It is sufficient to determine a combination of definite decorative symbols constituting any one of the two chances of opening TC1 to TC4 by referring to. Further, when any one of the fluctuation pattern PC1-4 and the fluctuation pattern PC1-5 is designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command, for example, by executing the same processing as in step S754, the final stop symbols constituting the reach combination are performed. What is necessary is just to determine the combination of the definite design which becomes.

  When it is determined in step S755 that the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “non-probability change” or “probability change” other than “probability” (step S755; No), the final stop constituting the big hit combination After determining the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that will be the symbols (step S757), the final stop symbol determining process is terminated. As an example, in the process of step S757, first, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the big hit fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the production control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and subsequently stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. Stop by aligning with the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the display screen of the image display device 5 by referring to the stored predetermined jackpot fixed symbol determination table. A decorative symbol having the same symbol number is determined.

  After the final stop symbol determination process as described above is executed in step S552 of FIG. 41, a variable display effect setting process is executed (step S553). FIG. 43 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variable display effect setting process executed in step S514. In the variable display effect setting process shown in FIG. 43, the effect control CPU 120 first performs “slip” according to the change pattern specified by reading the EXT data in the change pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11, for example. It is determined whether or not it is “with slip” that executes the variable display effect of “” (step S771).

  If it is determined in step S771 that there is “slip” (step S771; Yes), a decorative symbol that is a pre-slip temporary stop symbol that is temporarily stopped in the “slip” variable display effect is determined (step S772). As an example, in the process of step S772, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a pre-slip temporary stop symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. The decorative symbol that becomes the temporary stop symbol before slip may be determined by referring to a predetermined pre-slip temporary stop symbol determination table.

  When it is determined in step S771 that there is no “slip” (step S771; No), after executing the process of step S772, for example, the EXT data in the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is read. In accordance with the variation pattern specified in the above, it is determined whether or not the “pseudo continuous” variable display effect is executed (step S773). At this time, if it is determined that there is “pseudo-continuous” (step S773; Yes), the decoration that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” and constitutes one of the pseudo-continuous chance items GC1 to GC8. A symbol is determined (step S774). As an example, in the process of step S774, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a pseudo-continuous chance updated by a random counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to a predetermined pseudo-continuous chance determination table, etc., every time a pseudo-continuous change (re-variation) is executed, a temporary stop display is performed and a decorative pattern constituting any of the pseudo-continuous chances GC1 to GC8 is determined. do it.

  When it is determined in step S773 that it is not “there is pseudo-continuity” (step S773; No), the variable display effect setting processing is ended as it is.

  After performing the variable display effect setting process as described above in step S553 of FIG. 41, the notice effect setting process is executed (step S554). For example, in the notice effect setting process, it is determined whether or not a notice effect is to be executed, and when it is executed, which one of a plurality of kinds of notice effects is to be executed, such as “character notice” or “operation notice”. Is done. In addition, processing for determining a notice pattern as one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance is performed in accordance with the kind of notice effect (notice effect type).

  Following the notice effect setting process in step S554, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step S555). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared symbol variation control patterns corresponding to the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command, for example, and sets it as a usage pattern. Also, any one of a plurality of continuous production control patterns prepared in correspondence with the continuous production pattern or the continuous production count value determined in the continuous production start setting process of FIG. 39 is selected and set as a use pattern. If the production interruption flag is on, the set of continuous production control patterns only needs to be skipped, and the continuous production control pattern set is skipped in this way, thereby reducing processing by the program. be able to. Further, in response to the notice pattern determined in the notice effect setting process in step S554, one of a plurality of prepared notice effect control patterns is selected and set as a use pattern.

  Following the processing of step S555, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 is set corresponding to the change pattern indicated in the change pattern designation command (step S556). And the setting for starting the fluctuation | variation of the decoration design in the image display apparatus 5 is performed (step S557). At this time, for example, the display control command designated by the display control data included in the symbol variation control pattern determined as the use pattern in step S555 is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. The variation of the decorative symbols may be started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the display screen 5. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the decorative symbol changing process (step S558).

  Subsequently, a start winning memory display update process is executed (step S559). In this start winning memory display update process, in response to the setting to start the decoration symbol change in the image display device 5 in step S556, the hold data of the hold number 1 in the special figure hold storage unit 195 is deleted. At the same time, the hold data after the hold number 2 is moved one by one. Here, when the continuous production pattern is stored in association with the deleted hold data, the continuous production flag is turned off because the continuous production is ended. Further, if the continuous production pattern is associated with the hold data after the hold data is moved, for example, the hold display portion as a target is displayed in the corresponding display color in comparison with the hold display mode table shown in FIG. Display. After the process of step S559, the decorative symbol variation setting process ends.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation process executed in step S172 of FIG. In the decorative symbol variation process shown in FIG. 44, the effect control CPU 120 first updates the effect control process timer value (for example, 1 subtraction) (step S562), and then performs the effect control on the updated effect control process timer value. Compared with the effect control process timer determination value indicated by the pattern, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the timer determination values (step S563). And if it does not correspond to any timer determination value (step S563; No), the decorative symbol changing process is terminated.

  If the timer determination value matches with the timer determination value in step S563 (step S563; Yes), the effect control execution data (for example, display control data, voice control data, etc.) stored in the effect control pattern in association with the timer determination value. The lamp control data, a part or all of the operation detection control data) or the end code is read (step S564). Here, when the plurality of timer determination values indicated by the effect control pattern in the process of step S563 match the effect control process timer value, the plurality of stored timer determination values are associated with each other and stored. The effect control execution data may be read out in the process of step S564. In step S564, it is determined whether an end code has been read (step S565). At this time, if it is determined that it is not an end code (step S565; No), after performing the effect operation control according to the effect control execution data read in step S564 (step S566), the decorative symbol variation End the middle process.

  For example, in the rendering operation control by the process of step S566, a display control command designated by the display control data is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, and a command corresponding to the sound number data designated by the voice control data is issued. Of the transmission to the audio control board 13 and the output of the signal specified by the lamp control data to the lamp control board 14, a part or all of them may be performed sequentially or in parallel (if only one operation is performed). If done alone). In addition, in the effect operation control by the process of step S566, whether or not it is an operation effective period in which the operation action of the player or the like on the operation unit 30 is effectively detected based on the operation detection control data read out in step S564. Determine. At this time, if the operation is valid, it is determined based on the detection signal transmitted from the operation detection switch 31 whether or not the player's operation on the operation unit 30 has been detected. And when operation with respect to the operation part 30 is not detected but an operation valid period is complete | finished, presentation operation control according to operation detection control data is complete | finished. On the other hand, when an operation on the operation unit 30 is detected within the operation effective period, the operation on the operation unit 30 is performed, for example, by changing to an effect control pattern specified by the operation detection control data. It is only necessary to perform control or setting for changing the rendering operation in response to the above.

  If it is determined in step S565 that it is an end code (step S565; Yes), for example, by setting a predetermined timer initial value in the production control process timer, the hit start designation command reception waiting time is set. This is performed (step S567). Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3” that is a value corresponding to the process at the end of the decorative symbol variation (step S568), and then the process during the decorative symbol variation is terminated.

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation end process executed in step S173 of FIG. In the decorative symbol variation end process shown in FIG. 45, the effect control CPU 120 first displays the final decorative symbol, which is the final stop symbol, as a complete stop display and displays it (step S571). If a decorative symbol stop command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, the decorative symbol display areas of “left”, “middle”, and “right” are displayed until the decorative symbol stop command is received. The temporary stop display may be performed so that, for example, the decorative pattern fluctuation display is performed at 5L, 5C, and 5R.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S571, for example, by determining whether or not a hit start designation command has been received, or by reading the EXT data of the hit start designation command when received, the special figure display result is “big hit”. It is determined whether or not (step S578). At this time, if it is determined that the special figure display result is “big hit” (step S578; Yes), the value of the production process flag is updated to “4”, which is a value corresponding to the big hit control production processing. (Step S579), the decorative symbol variation end process is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S578 that the special figure display result is not “big hit” (step S578; No), it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is “small hit” (step S580). At this time, if it is determined that the special figure display result is “small hit” (step S580; Yes), the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5” which is a value corresponding to the effect process during the small hit control. (Step S581), the decorative symbol variation end processing is terminated. When it is determined in step S580 that the special figure display result is not “small hit” (step S580; No), the value of the effect process flag is initialized to “0” (step S582), and the decoration symbol variation ends. End time processing.

  Next, specific examples of various effects performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

  FIG. 46 shows operation modes of the first reserved memory number display combination 5D and the second reserved storage number display combination 5U of the production pattern types A to C. In the first reserved memory number display accessory 5D and the second reserved memory number display accessory 5U, the front-rear axis (not shown) provided at the upper end portion thereof is the upper position of the left and right sides of the image display device 5. It is pivotally supported by the shaft and is provided so as to be reciprocally swingable around the upper end between a vertical position in a vertical posture and an inclined position overlapping the display area of the image display device 5.

  In the present embodiment, the operation modes of the first reserved memory number display combination 5D and the second reserved memory number display combination 5U are the same, and therefore the operation modes of the first reserved storage number display combination 5D will be described below. I will explain only.

  The first reserved memory number display combination 5D is a display corresponding to the hold 4 based on the fact that the game ball won in the normal winning ball device 6A and the game ball started and won by the first start port switch 22A is detected. The display color of the part changes to one of blue, red, and rainbow, and reciprocally swings counterclockwise around the upper end.

  As for the lighting state of the hold display section, the continuous production pattern type A is blue (see FIG. 46A), the continuous production pattern type B is red (see FIG. 46B), and the continuous production pattern type C is blue (FIG. 46). (Refer to (C)), and lights up when the swing operation of the first reserved stored number display accessory 5D is started.

  The swing angle of the first reserved memory number display accessory 5D (the amount of movement of the first reserved memory number display accessory 5D) is 25 degrees for the continuous effect pattern type A (see FIG. 46A), and the continuous effect pattern type. B is 50 degrees (see FIG. 46 (B)), and the continuous performance pattern type C is 75 degrees (see FIG. 46 (C)), but it moves from the vertical position to the inclined position and returns to the vertical position again. The reciprocating operation time is set to a fixed time (for example, 1 second in this embodiment).

  That is, with respect to the swing angle, the pattern A is smaller than the pattern B and the pattern C is larger (swing angle; pattern A <pattern B <pattern C), so that the first reserved memory number display accessory 5D reciprocates. The amount (movement distance) of pattern A is shorter than that of pattern B, and pattern C is longer (reciprocation amount; pattern A <pattern B <pattern C), but the reciprocating operation time is all constant time (reciprocation time; pattern A). = Pattern B = Pattern C). Therefore, the movement speed of pattern A is slower than that of pattern B, and pattern C is faster (movement speed; pattern A <pattern B <pattern C).

  In this embodiment, the movement speed is varied according to the movement angle (movement amount) in each pattern so that the reciprocation time of each pattern is constant, but the movement speed of each pattern is constant, The reciprocating operation time may be varied. Moreover, even if the movement angle (movement amount) is the same, a pattern with different big hit reliability depending on the movement speed may be set, or even if the movement speed is the same, a pattern with different big hit reliability depending on the movement angle (movement amount). May be set.

  In the present embodiment, the moving speed of each of the continuous performance patterns A to C is constant (the pattern A is low speed, the pattern B is medium speed, and the pattern C is high speed). The movement speed may be changed during the movement, such as from high speed to medium speed. In this case, the pattern that changes to one speed (for example, high speed) among the plurality may be set so that the reliability of the big hit is higher than the pattern that does not change to one speed (for example, low speed, medium speed). . Further, a pattern with a large number of times of speed change (for example, three times) may be set so that the reliability of the big hit is higher than a pattern with a small number of times of change (for example, twice).

  FIG. 46D shows an example of the operation mode of the first reserved memory number display combination 5D at the start of the target hold variation. In this embodiment, when any of the continuous performance patterns A13, 23, B13, 23, C13, and 23 is determined, when the change of the target suspension starts, each pattern is matched in the same manner as at the time of winning. Move in a moving manner.

  On the other hand, in the hold display section, the display of the target hold display section (hold 1) is turned off according to the start of fluctuation. In this embodiment, since the variable display game in which the start condition is satisfied first is lit from the bottom to the top based on the occurrence of the start winning, the first reserved memory number display accessory 5D is vertical. When moving from the position and reaching the inclined position, in the image display device 5, the lower end of the first reserved memory number display accessory 5D is directed toward the longitudinal extension of the first reserved memory number display accessory 5D. By moving and displaying the target hold display section, an effect is provided as if the target hold display section popped out. Thereby, when the fluctuation | variation corresponding to object holding starts, the player's expectation with respect to becoming a big hit in the said fluctuation | variation can be given.

  Next, an example of the production operation in the continuous production will be described with reference to FIGS.

  As an example, as shown in FIG. 47A, decorations of “left”, “middle”, and “right” provided on the display screen of the image display device 5 when the first reserved storage number is “3”. When the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the game ball that has won the normal winning ball device 6A and started and won by the first start switch 22A is detected. It is assumed that a winning determination result 5 designation command for notifying that the variable display result is “per super reach” is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  In the production control board 12, the continuous production start condition establishment prize determination result 4 flag is set based on the determination that the prize determination result 5 designation command is received in step S673 of FIG. 36 (step S674; Yes). (Step S508), the continuous production start setting process (Step S639 ′) is executed. Here, it is assumed that the continuous effect pattern B-10 is determined as the use pattern in the continuous effect start setting process.

  In the hold memory update process of step S639, as shown in FIG. 47 (B), the hold 4 in the first hold memory number display accessory 5D is set based on the continuous performance pattern B-10 determined in step S639 ′. Display control is performed so that the corresponding on-hold display unit displays red, and after swinging 50 degrees at medium speed to the tilt position, the display is returned to the vertical position at the same speed. At this time, since the special symbol change time corresponding to the variable display pattern is ended, the variable display of the decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is completed. (See FIG. 47C).

  Thereafter, when the first start condition is satisfied, variable display of decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started (step S557). At this time, the red display hold display portion in the hold 4 is returned to non-display, and the display part below the display part returned to non-display is changed to red display (see step S559, FIG. 47D).

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 47 (E) to 47 (G), the decorative symbol variable display and the display control of the hold display unit are executed in accordance with the number of reserved memories. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 47 (H), variable display corresponding to the continuous performance pattern B-10 is started. For example, when the variable display result is “big hit”, as shown in FIG. 47 (I), the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state, and the reach effect that the reach mode becomes the super reach is executed. After that, the image display device 5 derives and displays the final decorative symbol combination that is the final stop symbol constituting the jackpot combination, for example, as shown in FIG. To do.

  As described above, in the continuous effect of the continuous effect pattern B-10, when the hold number is 4, the display mode in the hold display unit corresponding to the hold 4 becomes the special display mode (red display), and the variable stored and stored. Each time the display is digested, the special display mode moves downward. Thereby, it can be suggested to the player that the display result of the variable display of the hold display which is the special display mode becomes “big hit”.

  As another example, as shown in FIG. 48A, the first reserved storage number is “3”, and “left”, “middle”, “right” provided on the display screen of the image display device 5 are provided. When the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a game ball that has won the normal winning ball device 6A and started and won by the first starting switch 22A is detected. It is assumed that a winning determination result 5 designation command for notifying that the variable display result is “per super reach” is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  In the production control board 12, the continuous production start condition establishment prize determination result 4 flag is set based on the determination that the prize determination result 5 designation command is received in step S673 of FIG. 36 (step S674; Yes). (Step S508), the continuous production start setting process (Step S639 ′) is executed. Here, it is assumed that the continuous effect pattern C-23 is determined as the use pattern in the continuous effect start setting process.

  In the hold memory update process of step S639, as shown in FIG. 48 (B), the hold 4 in the first hold memory number display accessory 5D is set based on the continuous performance pattern C-23 determined in step S639 ′. The display control for displaying the corresponding hold display portion in white is performed, and the special symbol change time corresponding to the variable display pattern is ended, so that the decorative symbol display area 5L for “left”, “middle”, and “right” is displayed. The variable display of decorative symbols in 5C and 5R ends.

  Thereafter, when the first start condition is satisfied, variable display of decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started (step S557). At this time, the first reserved memory number display accessory 5D is swung at a high speed by 75 degrees to the tilted position, and the white display hold display portion in the hold 4 is returned to non-display and returned to non-display. The display part below the display part is changed to rainbow color display (see step S559, FIG. 48C).

  Then, after the variable display of the decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R ends, as shown in FIGS. Depending on the number, the decorative display variable display and the display control of the hold display unit are executed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 48G, variable display corresponding to the continuous effect pattern C-23 is started.

  Here, the first reserved stored number display combination 5D is swung again by 75 degrees from the vertical position toward the inclined position. At the same time, the display control for returning the hold display unit corresponding to the hold 1 in the first hold memory number display accessory 5D to non-display is performed, and in the image display device 5, from the lower end of the first hold memory number display accessory 5D. An effect of moving and displaying the target hold display portion toward the extension line in the longitudinal direction of the first hold memory number display accessory 5D is performed.

  For example, when the variable display result is “big hit”, as shown in FIG. 48H, the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state, and the reach effect that the reach mode becomes the super reach is executed. The After that, the image display device 5 derives and displays the final decorative symbol combination which is the final stop symbol constituting the jackpot combination, for example, as shown in FIG. To do.

  As described above, in the continuous effect of the continuous effect pattern C-23, when the hold number is 4, the display mode in the hold display unit becomes the special display mode (rainbow display), and the variable display stored on hold is digested. Each time, the special display mode moves downward. It is possible to suggest to the player that the display result of the variable display of the hold display which is a special display mode becomes “big hit”. In addition, when the continuous effect of the continuous effect pattern C as shown in FIG. 48 is executed, the “big hit” is more effective than when the continuous effect of the continuous effect pattern B as shown in FIG. 47 is executed. (See FIG. 18). Thereby, the player comes to pay attention to which timing the display mode of the hold display changes to the special display mode, the effect of producing the continuous effect is improved, and the interest of the game is also improved.

  As another example, as shown in FIG. 49A, the first reserved storage number is “3”, and the “left”, “middle”, “ When the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the gaming ball is won in the normal winning ball device 6A and is started and won by the first starting switch 22A. Is detected, and a winning determination result 1 designation command for notifying that the variable display result is “non-reach loss” is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  In the production control board 12, the continuous production start condition establishment prize determination result 4 flag is set based on the determination that the prize determination result 5 designation command is received in step S673 of FIG. 36 (step S674; Yes). (Step S508), the continuous production start setting process (Step S639 ′) is executed. Here, it is assumed that continuous production pattern A-11 is determined as the usage pattern in the continuous production start setting process.

  In the hold memory update process of step S639, as shown in FIG. 49 (B), the hold 4 in the first hold memory number display accessory 5D is set based on the continuous performance pattern B-10 determined in step S639 ′. Display control is performed so that the corresponding holding display section is displayed in blue, and the display is swung 25 degrees at a low speed to a tilt position, and then returned to the vertical position at the same speed. At this time, since the special symbol change time corresponding to the variable display pattern is ended, the variable display of the decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is completed. (See FIG. 50C).

  Thereafter, when the first start condition is satisfied, variable display of decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is started (step S557). At this time, the blue display hold display portion in the hold 4 is returned to non-display, and the display portion below the display portion returned to non-display is changed to blue display (see step S559, FIG. 49D).

  And as shown to FIG.49 (E)-(G), although the variable display of a decoration symbol and the display control of a hold display part are performed according to the number of reservation memory, a continuous production pattern is A-11. In response to this, as shown in FIG. 49 (F), when the hold number is 2, control for returning the blue display to the white display is executed (step S559). Then, after the new variable display is ended (see FIG. 49G), variable display corresponding to the continuous effect pattern A-11 is started as shown in FIG. 49H. After that, the image display device 5 displays and displays the final decorative symbol combination that is the final stop symbol constituting the non-reach combination, for example, as shown in FIG. finish.

  As described above, in the continuous effect of the continuous effect pattern A-11, when the hold number is 4, the display mode in the hold display unit becomes the special display mode (blue display), and the variable display stored on hold is digested. Each time, the special display mode moves downward, but when the reservation number is 2, the effect is returned to the normal display mode (white). As shown in FIG. 20A, in the setting example of the continuous effect cancellation determination table, when the variable display result is “lost” (particularly when “non-reach lose”), the variable display result is “big hit”. It is easier to decide to stop the continuous performance than in the case of. As a result, the frequency of execution of the continuous performance can be improved, and when the “big hit” is not achieved, the ratio of the special display mode returning to the normal display mode is high, so that the player's expectation can be prevented from being impaired. .

  Although not shown in detail, the continuous effect of the continuous effect pattern A-12 is a variable that is stored and stored in a special display mode (blue display) when the hold number is 4. Each time the display is digested, the special display mode moves downward, but when the hold number is 1, the display returns to the normal display mode (white).

  That is, as shown in FIG. 20B, in the setting example of the continuous production stop timing determination table, when the variable display result is “big hit” rather than “losing”, the holding number is 1 In addition, it is easy to decide to return from the special display mode to the normal display mode. In addition, when it is “super-reach lose” and when the holding number is 1, it is easier to decide to return from the special display mode to the normal display mode rather than “non-reach loss”. Thereby, the possibility of becoming super reach can be notified by the timing when the special display mode returns to the normal display mode, so that the player pays attention to the continuous performance, and the interest of the game is improved.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 as an embodiment of the present invention, the hold display mode is changed from the normal display mode white display to the special display mode blue, red, rainbow, or the like. Along with the implementation of the continuous effect (notice effect), the first reserved memory number display accessory 5D and the second reserved memory number display accessory 5U having the hold display part swing around the upper end, so the hold It is possible to pay attention to the continuous performance by the hold display on the display unit, and it is possible to carry out effective notice.

  In addition, the holding display unit is a movable body provided movably by the first holding accessory motor 83 and the second holding accessory motor 84 that are driving means, and the first holding memory number display accessory 5D and the second holding hold. Since the movable body which is a three-dimensional entity provided with the hold display unit is moved by being provided in the stored number display accessory 5U, compared with the case where the hold display unit by the image is moved, It is possible to make the player pay more attention to the notice effect.

  Further, in the continuous performance, the hold display mode is changed to one special display mode among a plurality of types of special display modes (for example, blue, red, and rainbow colors), and a plurality of types of movement amounts (first hold) First, the movement amount corresponding to the type of the special display mode that changes in the movement number when the stored number display accessory 5D moves from the vertical position to any angle of 25 degrees, 50 degrees, and 75 degrees. By moving the reserved memory number display accessory 5D and the second reserved memory number display accessory 5U, the player also pays attention to which special display mode is changed and at which movement amount. As a result, the player can pay more attention to the continuous performance, and the difference in the amount of movement can be easily understood depending on the position of the hold display section after the movement.

  Further, in the continuous production, the hold display mode is changed to one special display mode among a plurality of types of special display modes (for example, blue, red, and rainbow colors), and a plurality of types of movement modes (for example, the first display mode) The change in the movement speed (low speed, medium speed, high speed) and the way of movement (for example, vibration, etc.) from the vertical position to the inclined position of the first reserved memory number display accessory 5D and the second reserved memory number display accessory 5U changes. By moving the first reserved memory number display combination 5D and the second reserved memory number display combination 5U in a movement mode according to the type of the special display mode, the player changes to which special display mode and which It will also pay attention to whether it moves in the movement mode, so it is possible to make the player further pay attention to the continuous performance, and by giving the player a difference in the way of movement while moving, To watch the movement. That.

  Moreover, in continuous production pattern X-13, 23, by performing the variable start time movement control which moves a holding | maintenance display part with the start of the variable display based on the holding memory made into the object of continuous production, Since the player can recognize that the variable display based on the target right is started, the player can be made to pay attention to the variable display.

  Further, the movement amount or movement mode of the first reserved memory number display accessory 5D or the second reserved memory number display accessory 5U in the continuous performance, the first reserved memory number display accessory 5D or the second accompanying the start of variable display. Different probabilities are set for each combination type of the movement amount or movement mode of the reserved memory number display accessory 5U, and the continuous effect pattern to be executed when it is determined that the jackpot display result is based on the set probability is By being determined, there is a possibility that a jackpot display result will be obtained depending on the combination of the movement amount or movement mode of the hold display section at the time of continuous production and at the start of variable display by the right that is the subject of the continuous production As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the start of variable display from the time of continuous production.

  In the continuous production start setting process, as a combination pattern to be executed when it is determined that a jackpot display result is obtained, the first reserved memory number display accessory 5D and the second reserved memory number display accessory in the notice effect (continuous effect) are used. A plurality of combination patterns by a combination of a movement amount or movement mode of 5U and a movement amount or movement mode of the first reserved memory number display accessory 5D or the second reserved memory number display accessory 5U accompanying the start of variable display If the predetermined combination pattern is determined with a higher probability than the other combination patterns, the reliability of each jackpot of each continuous performance pattern shown in FIG. 17 is not necessarily different. Good.

  Also, as the timing for executing the continuous effect, the right corresponding to the reserved memory that is the target of the continuous effect is stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B, and the special figure reservation storage unit 195. Can be determined at the time of winning, which is the timing of the winning, and at the start of fluctuation, which is later than the time of the winning, and the continuous effect is executed at the start of the variation than when the continuous effect is executed at the time of winning. Even if the display mode of the hold memory does not change at the time of winning a prize, by determining the continuous production pattern so that the ratio of the display result of the variable display according to the right to the jackpot display result becomes high Since it may change from time to time, the player will pay attention to when the display mode of the reserved memory changes, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, since the possibility of being a jackpot display result varies depending on the timing at which the display mode of the hold display unit changes from white to a special display mode, the player comes to pay attention to the display mode of the hold memory, and the interest of the game is improved To do.

  In addition, as a continuous effect, for example, a continuous effect pattern X-10, 13, which maintains a hold display changed to one of blue, red, and rainbow until a variable display according to the right corresponding to the hold display is executed. 20, 23, 30, 40 (first notice effect) and the hold 2 before the variable display according to the right to which the hold display corresponds to the hold display changed to blue, red, or rainbow color or It is possible to decide to execute the continuous production pattern X-11, 12, 21, 22 (second notice production) that returns to the white display at the hold 1 (predetermined timing), and that the big hit game result is obtained. It is determined that the continuous production pattern X-10, 13, 20, 23, 30, 40 is executed under the condition, and the continuous production pattern X-1 is obtained under the condition that it is determined by the hold determination means that the jackpot display result is not obtained. , 12, 21 and 22 can be executed to improve the frequency of execution of the continuous effect, and when the jackpot display result is not obtained, the special effect is returned to the normal display mode. Therefore, it can be prevented that the player's expectation is impaired.

  Further, in this embodiment, not only when the game result is a big hit game result at the time of winning, but when it is determined that the variable display pattern of variable display is a specific variable display pattern (for example, super reach). However, it is possible to effectively enhance the player's expectation by enabling continuous performance.

  Further, in the above description, only the continuous effect on the first reserved memory number display accessory 5D will be described, and the second reserved memory number display accessory 5U is performed in the same manner as the first reserved memory number display accessory 5D. Although the description in is omitted, for the second reserved memory number display accessory 5U, the display mode of the hold display unit, the amount of movement of the accessory, and the movement mode may be different from those of the first reserved memory number display accessory 5D. It may or may not be implemented.

  In this embodiment, as an example of the notice effect, a continuous effect that is continuously performed over a plurality of variable displays has been applied. However, for example, only at the start of a variable display that is a target of a winning prize or a hold notice. The notice effect to be implemented may be used.

  Next, an example of the production operation in the continuous production as the first modification of the present invention will be described based on FIG.

  In the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 50A, the first reserved storage number is “3”, and “left”, “middle”, “right” provided on the display screen of the image display device 5 are provided. When the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a game ball that has won a prize in the normal winning ball device 6A and started and won by the first starting switch 22A is displayed. Based on the detection, the first reserved memory number display accessory 5D starts moving toward the inclined position, and at the same time, the display mode of the hold display unit is changed to the special display mode. As shown in FIG. 50 (B), the first reserved memory number display accessory 5D has returned to the vertical position as shown in FIG. 50 (C) after reaching the inclined position. Sometimes change the display mode of the hold display section to a special display mode Good.

  Thus, the lighting timing of the hold display portion is not limited to when the first hold stored number display accessory 5D starts swinging toward the tilt position, as shown in FIG. It may be when returning to the vertical position. Thus, for example, when the variable display result is a big hit, the timing when the hold display portion is turned on is the time when the first hold stored number display accessory 5D is returned to the vertical position than when the swing of the first hold stored number display accessory 5D is started. By making the direction easier to select, the reliability of the jackpot can be made different depending on the lighting timing. In addition to the above, the lighting timing of the hold display unit may be, for example, any timing during the forward or backward movement of the swing, or may be the timing when the tilted position is reached.

  Next, an example of the rendering operation in the continuous production as the second modification of the present invention will be described. As shown in FIG. 51A, the first reserved memory number is “3”, and the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas provided on the display screen of the image display device 5 When the decorative symbols are variably displayed at 5L, 5C, and 5R, the game ball is won in the normal winning ball device 6A and the game ball that has been won by the first start port switch 22A is detected. Thus, as shown in FIG. 51 (B), display control is performed in which the hold display portion corresponding to the hold 4 is displayed in blue without moving the first hold memory number display combination 5D.

  Next, the blue display hold display portion in the hold 4 is returned to non-display, and the display part under the display part returned to non-display is changed to blue display, and the variable display of the decorative design is started. Here, after oscillating the first reserved memory number display accessory 5D (reciprocally swinging at a medium speed) (see FIG. 51C), it is swung 25 degrees at a low speed and temporarily stopped (FIG. 51D). )), And again oscillates (reciprocally oscillates at high speed) (see FIG. 51E), and further oscillates by 50 degrees from that position (see FIG. 51F). Then, at the time of returning to the vertical position, the blue display hold display portion in the hold 3 is changed to red display.

  Thus, the movement of the first reserved stored number display accessory 5D includes not only swinging around the upper end portion but also swinging by reciprocating swinging and the like.

  Further, the swing of the first reserved memory number display accessory 5D is not limited to the one that reaches the tilt position by one swing, but is performed stepwise as described above. May be. In this case, for example, the jackpot reliability can be varied according to the number of times that the temporary stop is performed before reaching the final position.

  Further, in order to move the hold display unit in a predetermined manner as the continuous effect is executed, not only the hold display unit is moved in a predetermined manner at the time of executing the continuous effect, but also FIG. 51 (C). As shown in FIG. 51D, the hold display unit is moved in a predetermined manner immediately before the first hold memory number display accessory 5D is swung in FIG. Moving the display unit in a predetermined manner.

  Next, an example of the rendering operation in the continuous production as the third modification of the present invention will be described. As shown in FIG. 52A, the first reserved memory number is “3”, and the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas provided on the display screen of the image display device 5 When the decorative symbols are variably displayed at 5L, 5C, and 5R, the game ball is won in the normal winning ball device 6A and the game ball that has been won by the first start port switch 22A is detected. Thus, as shown in FIG. 52 (B), display control is performed in which the hold display section corresponding to the hold 4 is displayed in white blinking without moving the first hold storage number display combination 5D.

  As shown in FIG. 52 (C), a blue reserved display mark is positioned near the lower end of the first reserved memory number display accessory 5D moved 25 degrees from the vertical position, and the first reserved position moved 50 degrees from the vertical position. A red holding display mark is displayed at a position near the lower end of the stored number display accessory 5D, and an iridescent holding display mark is displayed at a position near the lower end of the first reserved memory number displaying accessory 5D moved by 75 degrees from the vertical position. The

  Then, as shown in FIG. 52 (C), at the position where the first reserved memory number display accessory 5D is swung 25 degrees from the vertical position, the blue hold display mark is the first reserved memory number. After the display control is performed so as to be sucked into the display accessory 5D, the white display holding display portion in the holding 3 is changed to blue display. Next, as shown in FIG. 52D, at the position where the first reserved memory number display combination 5D is swung by 50 degrees from the vertical position, the red display mark is displayed on the image display device 5 at the first reserved memory number. After the display control is performed so as to be sucked into the display accessory 5D, the blue display hold display portion in the hold 3 is changed to red display. Further, as shown in FIG. 52 (E), at the position where the first reserved storage number display combination 5D is swung by 75 degrees from the vertical position, the rainbow-colored hold display mark is displayed in the first hold memory. After the display control is performed so as to be sucked into the number display accessory 5D, the red display holding display portion in the holding 3 is changed to a rainbow color display (see FIG. 52E).

  As described above, the display color of the hold display section may change stepwise as the swing angle of the first hold stored number display accessory 5D increases. And, for example, the reliability of the jackpot can be made different depending on not only the swing angle but also the number of times the display color changes or the changed color.

  In addition to moving the first reserved memory number display accessory 5D and changing the color of the hold display portion in this way, the first reserved memory number display accessory 5D and the image display device 5 relate to each other. By performing the effect to be performed, the reliability of the jackpot can be made different depending on whether or not the effect by the image display device 5 is performed.

  Next, an operation mode of the first reserved memory number display accessory 5D as the modified example 4 of the present invention will be described. The first reserved memory number display accessory 5D of the embodiment and the first to third modifications is provided on the left and right sides of the display area of the image display device 5 so as to be able to swing around the upper end portion. The upper side or the lower side of the display area of the device 5 may be provided so as to be swingable around the left end or the right end. Further, the present invention is not limited to the one that can swing around one end as described above. For example, the present invention may be provided to be movable in the vertical and horizontal directions.

  Further, the form of the reserved memory number display combination provided with the hold display section is not limited to the rod-like form as in the present embodiment, and includes any form. Further, the arrangement position of the reserved memory number display combination is not limited to the side portion of the image display device 5 or the like, and can be arranged at an arbitrary position as long as it can be visually recognized by the player.

  Further, the present invention is not limited to the holding display unit provided in the holding storage number display combination configured separately from the image display device 5, but as shown in FIG. For example, a first reserved storage number display unit 5D ′ provided so as to be movable and displayable between a part of the five display areas, for example, a vertical position on the lower side of the display area and an upward position on the upper side.

  Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 53A, the first reserved storage number is “3”, and “left”, “middle”, “right” provided on the display screen of the image display device 5 are provided. When the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a game ball that has won a prize in the normal winning ball device 6A and started and won by the first starting switch 22A is displayed. Based on the detection, as shown in FIG. 53 (B), the display control for displaying the hold display section corresponding to the hold 4 in a white blinking display without moving the first hold memory number display section 5D ′. Done.

  As shown in FIG. 53C, a band-like area extending in the vertical direction is displayed in the left area corresponding to the first reserved storage number display portion 5D ′ in the display area of the image display device 5. Specifically, a blue region is formed from the vertical position of the lower end of the belt-shaped region to the center position in the vertical direction, a red region is formed from the center position to the upper end, and an iridescent region is formed from the upper end to the upper end.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 53C, after the first reserved memory number display unit 5D ′ rises from the vertical position at a predetermined speed with the start of the variation of the decorative pattern, the hold 3 is displayed in the blue region. Display control is performed to change the hold display unit corresponding to the white flashing display to the blue flashing display. Next, as shown in FIG. 53 (D), in the state of being located in the red region, display control for changing the hold display portion corresponding to hold 3 from blue flashing display to red flashing display is performed. As shown to E), in the state located in the rainbow-colored area | region, the display control which changes the holding | maintenance display part corresponding to the holding | maintenance 3 from a red blink display to a rainbow blink display is performed.

  In this way, the display color of the hold display unit may change stepwise as the amount of increase in the first hold storage number display unit 5D ′ increases. For example, not only the rising distance but also the display color changes. The reliability of the jackpot can be varied according to the number of times to be changed or the changed color.

  Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and modifications and additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. It is.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, the occurrence of a jackpot or superreach due to the reserved memory is notified only during variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot due to the reserved memory is not limited to this. You may be made to carry out the notice effect about generation | occurrence | production or super-reach generation even during the big hit.

  In addition, in the notice effect (prefetch effect) about the hold memory that is performed during these jackpots, the notice target is not the occurrence of a big hit or the occurrence of super reach like the continuous effect in the above embodiment, For example, it may be possible to carry out a pre-announcement effect during a big hit that suggests the type of hit (probability change, non-probability change big hit, sudden hit, small hit) and the number of hits that occur in all pending storage. In the case where the notice effect during the big hit is performed individually, the winning determination result designation command (FIG. 5C) used in the above-described embodiment according to the combination of the variation pattern type and the variable display result. ))), The symbol designation command and the variation category command shown in FIGS. 54 (A) and 54 (B) may be used.

  That is, the symbol designation command is a command for notifying the effect control board 12 of the variable display result, similar to the variable display result designation command transmitted at the start of the variable display in the embodiment, and the notification is started. The variation category command is a command to be performed in advance when a winning is made, and the variation category command indicates the type of variation pattern generated in the variable display corresponding to the starting winning in advance when the starting winning is made. By sending these symbol designation commands and variable category commands to the effect control board 12 with the start winning prize regardless of the gaming state, By using both the symbol designating command and the variable category command in other than the middle, While it becomes possible to grasp in detail which variable display result is obtained by which variation pattern than the time judgment result designation command, only the symbol designation command is used during the big hit that needs to perform many effects. By specifying only which type the variable display result for each start prize will be, and suggesting the type and number of these specified hits, for example, in a specific land, the specified hit type is a probable big hit If this is the case, the first reserved memory number display accessory 5D or the second reserved memory number display accessory 5U is moved at a large angle. 5D or the second reserved memory number display accessory 5U is moved at a medium angle, and if the specified hit type is a sudden hit or a small hit, the first reserved memory number display accessory 5D or The second reserved memory number display accessory 5U is moved at a small angle, and if the specified hit number is 1, the first reserved memory number display accessory 5D or the second reserved memory number display accessory 5U is reserved. The color of the display is changed to blue during movement, and if the specified hit number is 2, the color of the hold display of the first reserved memory number display accessory 5D or the second reserved memory number display accessory 5U is being moved. Is changed to red, and if the specified number of hits is 3, the color of the holding display of the first reserved memory number display accessory 5D or the second reserved memory number display accessory 5U is changed to rainbow when moving. Make announcements during big hits such as doing.

  In other words, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not the big hit or the small hit is made, the big hit type or the variation pattern type at the time of starting winning, and determines whether or not the big hit or the small hit is determined. A symbol designating command that can identify the determination result and a variation category command that can identify the determination result of the variation pattern type are transmitted. In addition, the production control microcomputer 100 is a continuous pre-reading notice before the variation display subject to the determination at the time of winning is executed based on the symbol designation command and the variation category command transmitted at the time of starting winning. The notice effect during the notice or the big hit is executed. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes a pre-reading notice (a big hit notice notice effect) based on the symbol designation command while being controlled in the big hit gaming state. In addition, the production control microcomputer 100 starts before the variation display subject to the determination at the time of winning is executed based on the symbol designation command and the variation category command when not controlled to the big hit gaming state. The pre-reading notice (continuous production) is executed in the variable display. With such a configuration, when a game ball passes through the start winning opening 13, 14, a symbol designation command and a variable category command are transmitted together, regardless of whether or not a big hit gaming state is achieved. The pre-reading notice can be executed before the change display subject to time determination is executed. Therefore, in order to perform different look-ahead effects depending on whether or not the game state is a big hit game state, it is possible to eliminate the need to perform control for transmitting different winning determination result commands, and the variable subject to determination at winning It is possible to prevent an increase in processing load and program capacity for executing the pre-reading notice before the display is executed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 54B, the types of variation patterns are classified into only non-reach, normal reach, and super reach. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as in the above embodiment. In order to enable the production control microcomputer 100 to specify more detailed variation pattern types such as the occurrence of slipping or pseudo-continuity when slipping or pseudo-continuity occurs, for example, it is stored in the main board 11. The data of the lost variation pattern type determination table (see FIG. 12) is also stored in the effect control board 12, and as shown in FIG. 55, the range of the random value MR3 extracted at the time of starting winning and the gaming state The variation determined by the game control microcomputer 560 by transmitting the variation category 1 designation command to the variation category 20 designation command corresponding to The turn control microcomputer 100 may be able to specify the turn in the same manner. In this case, when the game is not controlled to the big hit gaming state, the target of the determination at the time of winning is based only on the variable category command. The pre-reading notice (continuous production) may be executed in the starting variable display before the changed display is executed.

  That is, the specific game state determination means at the time of start for determining whether or not the specific game state (big hit) is obtained using the extracted numerical data for determining the specific game state extracted when the start condition is satisfied, The start-up effect mode determination means for determining which mode of the effect mode of the effect corresponding to the variable display of the identification information is made using the numerical data for determining the effect mode extracted when the condition is satisfied, Start transmitting a start specific game state determination result command that can specify the determination result of the start specific game state determination means, and a start effect mode determination result command that can specify the determination result of the start effect type determination means A time command transmission means, and an effect control means for controlling the execution of the effect based on a command from the game control means for controlling the progress of the game. Effect execution control means for performing control to execute an effect corresponding to the variable display in the display, the start time specific gaming state determination result command and the start time effect mode determination result command transmitted by the start time command transmission means, Based on the above, the advance notice effect executing means for executing the advance notice effect before the variable display of the identification information subjected to the determination by the start time specific gaming state determining means and the start time effect mode determining means is executed. And the advance notice effect executing means executes the advance notice effect based on the start-time specified game state determination result command when controlled to the specified game state. When the middle notice effect execution means and the specific gaming state are not controlled, based on the starting effect mode determination result command, In the variable display of the identification information that is started before the variable display of the identification information subjected to the determination by the moving time effect mode determination means is executed, the preliminary display effect execution during the variable display is executed to execute the prior notice effect. Means.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 5D 1st reserved memory number display accessory 5U 2nd reserved memory number display accessory 8a 1st special symbol display 8b 2nd special symbol display 9 Production display device 13 1st start winning opening 14 2nd start Winning mouth 20 Special variable winning ball device 31 Game control board (main board)
50 operation unit 56 CPU
83 1st holding | maintenance accessory motor 84 2nd holding | maintenance accessory motor 84
560 Game Control Microcomputer 80 Production Control Board 100 Production Control Microcomputer 101 Production Control CPU
109 VDP

Claims (1)

Based on the establishment of the start condition, it is provided with variable display means for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can each be identified, and the result of the game is determined by deriving the display result to the variable display means. A gaming machine that shifts to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player when the result is a specific gaming result,
Based on the establishment of the starting condition, a storage unit for storing a plurality of rights to perform variable display of the identification information up to a predetermined upper limit number;
Pre-determining means for deciding whether or not to make the game result a specific game result until a display result of the variable display of the identification information based on one right stored in the holding storage means is derived;
A hold display unit that is movable, the hold display unit displaying the number of rights stored in the hold storage unit on the hold display unit in an identifiable manner;
A hold determination unit that determines whether or not a determination result by the prior determination unit for each right stored in the hold storage unit is a determination result as the specific display result;
Based on the determination by the hold determination means, it is determined whether to execute a notice effect for changing the hold display mode in the hold display unit corresponding to the right to be determined from the normal display mode to the special display mode. A notice effect determining means to perform,
A notice effect execution means for executing the notice effect based on the determination result of the notice effect determination means;
With
The notice effect execution means implements notice effect movement control for moving the hold display unit in a predetermined manner along with the execution of the notice effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images